DIGITAL VIDEO
HDD/DVD VIDEO RECORDER
RD-XS32SB
OWNER’S MANUAL
OPERATIONS
Read “INSTALLATION GUIDE” first.
P000403710
S
PM0016697010
© 2004 Toshiba Corporation
Printed in China
Printed on 100% Recycled Paper
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Table of contents
Playing at various speeds ................................ 64
Introduction
Playing in fast reverse or fast forward .................... 64
Skipping to the next/previous chapter or track ........ 65
Playing in slow-motion .......................................... 65
Playing frame by frame ......................................... 66
Viewing still pictures
Caution for safety................................................ 4
About this product .............................................. 5
Compatible discs ................................................ 6
Index to parts and controls .............................. 12
(Playing a disc that contains still pictures) .............. 66
Front panel ........................................................... 12
Rear panel............................................................ 14
Remote control ..................................................... 16
Display ................................................................. 18
Locating by entering the number .................... 67
Locating by entering the number of a desired
section ................................................................. 67
Locating a specific point by entering its elapsed time
(Time Search) ....................................................... 68
Before operating this recorder ........................ 20
Key operation - EASY NAVI & QUICK MENU .. 23
Watching a TV broadcast in the sub window
(P in P Playback) ............................................... 69
Selecting the camera angle .............................. 70
Selecting Subtitles ............................................ 71
Zooming a picture ............................................. 72
Selecting the sound .......................................... 73
Recording
Before recording ............................................... 26
Initializing a DVD-RAM/RW disc (Logical Format)... 28
DVD-RAM physical format .................................... 29
Entering characters............................................... 30
Viewing JPEG files ............................................ 76
JPEG files compatibility......................................... 77
Recording a TV programme ............................. 32
Recording an external source.......................... 37
Programing a recording (REC MENU) ............. 40
VIDEO Plus+ Recording ................................... 46
Others................................................................. 48
Playing MP3/WMA files ..................................... 78
Playable files ........................................................ 79
Checking the current status and settings ...... 80
Operational status and setting details .................... 80
Using the time bar................................................. 81
Functions in the Quick Menu ........................... 82
Relay recording .................................................... 48
A-B recording ....................................................... 48
Reservation Disc (“Lock program record”).............. 49
To delete recorded content .................................... 50
To protect recorded content ................................... 50
Technical information ............................................ 51
Editing
Before editing .................................................... 86
For better use the HDD of this recorder.................. 86
Editing on this recorder ......................................... 87
Creating chapters.............................................. 90
Playback
Playlist editing
(Collecting desired scenes) ............................. 95
Information on playback ................................... 54
Playing recorded contents
(CONTENT MENU) ............................................. 55
Creating thumbnails
(Changing the picture on the
Playing a DVD video disc ................................. 60
CONTENT MENU) ............................................ 100
Locating a title using the top menu ........................ 61
Before dubbing................................................ 103
Pausing a TV broadcast to resume later ......... 62
High speed Library dubbing
Playing a TV programme currently being
(Dubbing only a specified part) ..................... 106
recorded ............................................................. 63
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing selected Items
(Dubbing specified parts together) ............... 108
Others
Before calling service personnel ................... 166
Rate conversion dubbing
Error codes on the display window ............... 169
Recording duration ......................................... 170
Language code list.......................................... 171
Specification .................................................... 172
(Dubbing at a modified bit rate) ..................... 112
Line-U dubbing
(Recording pictures while viewing them) ..... 116
Deleting selected items
(Deleting multiple specified parts) ................ 118
Combine Original titles
(Combine two titles into one) ......................... 120
Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW ....... 122
DVD-Video finalizing process ........................ 132
DV recording
(Recording from a digital video camera) ...... 136
Library
Using Library data........................................... 140
Basic operation of the Library system .................. 140
Searching for a desired title ........................... 141
Changing the listing order ...................................... 141
Searching ........................................................... 141
Jumping ............................................................. 142
Viewing Library data ....................................... 143
Viewing title information ...................................... 143
Viewing disc information...................................... 143
Maintenance of Library data ................................ 144
Checking remaining space............................. 147
Viewing a number and space of a disc .................. 147
Viewing remaining space .................................... 147
Function Setup
Customizing the function settings ................ 150
DVD Player settings ............................................ 154
Picture/Audio settings ......................................... 157
Display settings .................................................. 159
Operational settings ............................................ 160
DVD recorder operation ...................................... 161
Management settings.......................................... 163
Setting of picture and sound quality for
recording ............................................................ 164
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Caution for safety
Read “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”, “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS”,
“Precautions” and others of the “INSTALLATION GUIDE” first.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
About this product
Some differences
Playback Restrictions
This DVD recorder is more similar to a computer than it
is to a standard DVD player. In addition to a
This owner’s manual explains the basic instructions for
this recorder. Some DVD video discs are produced in a
manner that allows specific or limited operation during
playback. As such, the recorder may not respond to all
operating commands. This is not a defect in the
recorder. Please refer to the notes on compatible discs
later in this Introduction and to the discussion of DVD
playback and features later in this manual.
microprocessor, it contains a hard disc drive (an HDD),
an operating system, random access memory (RAM),
and a DVD-RAM/R/RW drive. The operating system
includes software stored on the HDD that is transferred
to the RAM when the machine is turned on and at other
times during operation. This transfer can take time.
Thus, when you turn on the DVD recorder, it may be a
minute or so before it is ready to use. Likewise, other
functions may not be performed as quickly as they would
on other AV equipment. In addition, because programs
stored on the DVD-RAM/R/RW drive cannot be accessed
as quickly as those stored on the HDD, accessing those
programs (or deleting a program from a DVD-RAM or
DVD-RW disc) may take more time. Please take these
factors into consideration as you use the DVD recorder.
“
“
” may appear on the TV screen during operation.
” means that the operation is not permitted by the
recorder or the disc.
Recording Restrictions
Copy-protected contents of DVD-Video disc, VIDEO
CDs or audio CDs on the market cannot be copied on
this recorder.
About the hard disc drive (HDD)
Contents without copy protection should be copied or
edited only in accordance with applicable copyright
laws, which may restrict copying or editing. Contents
that permit single copying (copy once contents) can be
recorded onto DVD-RAM discs, with some dubbing and
editing restrictions. DVD-R/RW discs cannot record
these contents.
Like any HDD, the HDD in the DVD recorder is a fragile
device that is susceptible to partial or complete failure if it
is jarred or as a result of use over time. It will not last
forever. Therefore, do not use the HDD for longer term
storage of programs you wish to retain. [If portions of the
HDD become damaged, programs recorded on those
portions may exhibit pixelization or block noise when
played back. Repeated playback of the program may
cause the problem to get worse and, eventually, the
program may become unplayable. Accordingly, if you
notice such noise in a program that you want to save,
you should transfer to a recordable DVD disc as soon as
possible.] Recordable DVD discs are also susceptible to
damage if not handled and stored carefully and some or
all of the programs on them may become unplayable.
You can reduce these risks by using high quality DVD
recordable discs and checking their playability from time
to time. If it becomes necessary to service your DVD
recorder, it may be necessary to delete some or all of the
programs on the HDD.
Compatiblity
In isolated cases, a disc bearing the DVD or CD logo
may not fully and properly play back all features. This
can be due, among other reasons, to problems and
errors that can occur during the creation or recording of
DVD and other software and the manufacture of
software discs (including blank discs). Moreover,
because of variations in the quality of discs, this
recorder may not be able to record on all discs that
bear a DVD-RAM, DVD-R or DVD-RW logo, but you
should not encounter difficulty if you use only high
quality recordable DVD discs.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Compatible discs
When you want to play DVD or CD software or copy programmes from the HDD to a recordable DVD,
load an appropriate disc into the recorder. There are many types and formats of discs. Please use the
following information to select an appropriate disc.
Notes
• Handle the disc according to the disc instruction manual.
• Depending on the data recording method or the disc status, playback or recording on this recorder may not be possible, even
if the disc is labeled as below. Toshiba cannot assure that all discs bearing the DVD or CD logos will operate as expected.
Please see the discussion of compatibility on page 5.
For recording / playback
Disc
Mark
Specification
Remarks
• Single sided 4.7GB (12cm (43/4 in.))
Read carefully the section “On DVD-RAM
DVD-RAM
• Double sided 9.4GB (12cm (43/4 in.))
discs” (
page 8).
Select a DVD-RAM disc that shows a
statement on its package such as “this disc
can be used with video recorders and drives
compatible with 4.7GB DVD-RAM discs” or
“this disc can copy images that permit single
copying.”
• 4.7GB For General Ver.2.0
Read carefully the section “On DVD-R discs”
DVD-R
(12cm (43/4 in.))
(
page 9).
Depending on the disc status or the
recording equipment, playback of the disc
may not be possible on this recorder.
• Ver. 1.1 or later (12cm
Read carefully the section “On DVD-RW
DVD-RW
(43/4 in.))
discs” (
page 9).
Depending on the disc status or the
recording equipment, playback of the disc
may not be possible on this recorder.
Using different disc types for different purposes
DVD-RAM discs for your personal library
DVD-RAM discs comply with the global standard DVD-VR (Video Recording) format, and are optimized for recording of
TV programs.You can rewrite repeatedly without deterioration of an image quality, erase unnecessary parts, divide a
chapter, or specify playback area by frame. Its cartridge is suitable for a longer-term storage and family use, and its
large capacity of 9.4 GB allows more recording space.
DVD-R discs when creating your own original discs for distribution
DVD-R discs are designed to comply with the global standard DVD-Video format, and can be recorded only once.
DVD-R discs are convenient when you edit your original content (recorded personal events such as a wedding party)
with this recorder, transfer them to the recorder and make copies to send to your friends or relatives. The discs can be
played on other compatible DVD players. DVD-RW discs, which are rewriteable, can be used as well.
* DVD-R and DVD-RW may not be the best suited format for recording TV programs. Because of the way the discs
are formatted, it may not be possible to edit or divide the program as you may prefer, to record secondary languages,
or programs that are copy protected in a way that allows only one copy. (NOTE: “Copy once” protected programs
generally can be recorded to DVD-RAM discs.)
* This recorder records on a DVD-R/RW disc in DVD-Video format only. In DVD-VR format, recording is not possible.
* On DVD-R/RW discs, direct recording, copying or the method “Creating a DVD-Video” (
page 122) are available.
We cannot guarantee that DVD-RAM/R/RW discs recorded on this recorder will be playable on all DVD recorders/
players. Similarly, there is no guarantee that all DVD-RAM/R/RW discs recorded on other recorders will be playable on
this recorder.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For playback only
Disc
Mark
Specification
Remarks
DVD video
disc
• 12cm (43/4 in.) / 8cm (31/4 in.)
The region number of this DVD recorder is 2.
If region numbers, corresponding to a
specific playable area, are printed on your
2
2
ALL
• Region number
or
DVD video disc and you do not find
or
ALL
, or the disc is encoded to permit
playback only in regions other than Region 2,
disc playback will not be allowed by the
recorder.
• 12cm (43/4 in.)
• DVD-VR mode
It is not possible to play contents recorded
from programs which are not copy-free
Depending on the disc status, playback may
not be possible.
DVD-RW
• 12cm (43/4 in.) / 8cm (31/4 in.)
• Version 1.1 and 2.0
VIDEO CD
DIGITAL VIDEO
• 12cm (43/4 in.) / 8cm (31/4 in.)
Audio CD
CD-R
• 12cm (43/4 in.)
• CD-DA (audio CD) format
Depending on the disc status, playback may
not be possible.
CD-RW
• You cannot play discs other than those listed above.
• You cannot play non-standardized discs even if they may be labeled as above.
• You cannot play discs with specialized encoding (such as SACD discs) or the DVD audio portions of DVD Audio
discs.
• You cannot play SVCD discs.
• This recorder uses the PAL colour system for recording and playback. The NTSC colour system is used for playback
only, by selecting an appropriate setting. A disc may fail to play, if it has data in the PAL colour system and the NTSC
colour system.You cannot add the PAL colour system data to the disc with the data recorded in the NTSC colour
2
ALL
system even if they have region marks
or
.
• There may be some DVD discs designed for this market that cannot be played on this recorder. If you encounter
please contact TOSHIBA customer service.
• Toshiba cannot assure that all discs bearing the DVD or CD logos will operate as expected. Please see the
discussion of compatibility on page 5.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Compatible discs (Continued)
On DVD-RAM discs
To protect recorded contents
Slide the write-protect tab to
“PROTECT” with something small
enough. The disc can play, but
cannot be edited or erased. Refer
to the instructions that come with
the disc.
Use only DVD-RAM discs that comply with DVD-
RAM standard Version 2.0 or 2.1.
The recorder cannot record on a disc formatted in any
other standard. When using such a disc, initialize it by
using the disc-format function of this recorder.
The recorder may not record, dub, or edit some DVD-
RAM discs, because they are edited/recorded with
another manufacture’s equipment or PC, contain a
large number of titles, or have little remaining capacity.
Also, a DVD-RAM disc may not be edited or recorded
if its title contains still pictures.
PROTECT
When using a disc without a
cartridge (commercially
available discs)
Discs without cartridges can easily
attract fingerprints and dust, which
DVD-RAM discs formatted in UDF2.0 on a PC are not
compatible with this recorder. Before using these
discs, initialize them on this recorder.
is the reason they are not recommended. If you
cannot avoid using them, handle with proper care.
When you write in a title column on a disc, use a pen
with a soft tip. Do not use a pen with a hard tip, such
as a ballpoint pen.
This recorder complies with current copyright
protection technology and can copy a disc only when
the disc permits copying once. When there is no
indication on the disc, copying will not be allowed.
Such an indication on a disc is required also for the
Library Management database.
Recommended discs
The following discs have been tested with this recorder:
9.4 GB double-sided cartridge: Panasonic LM-AD240U
4.7 GB single-sided cartridge: Panasonic LM-AB120U
DVD-RAM discs with cartridges are
recommended for recording.
Two types of DVD-RAM discs are
available: ones with cartridges and ones
without cartridges. You can use either of
them with this recorder, but the former
ones are recommended.
In order to record highly detailed data, make sure the
disc is clean. DVD-RAM discs with cartridges are
easier to handle in this regard.
Do not open the cartridge shutter. The disc may not
play, or may not be recorded or edited once it
becomes dirty.
There are two types of DVD-RAM cartridges;
removable (TYPE 2/4) and not removable (TYPE 1). It
is recommended you do not remove the disc even
when you can.
Refer to the instruction manual that comes with the
disc if it is absolutely necessary to remove the disc.
Some commercially available cartridge discs cannot
be recorded or edited once the inside discs are
removed.
The company does not hold any responsibility to compensate the contents which should have been recorded,
and any losses or damages (e.g. losses of business profit, or business intermission) that may arise from
malfunction of this recorder (not recording/editing as intended).
Problems arising in the following situations are included.
• When a DVD disc recorded on this recorder is used in a DVD recorder of another manufacturer, or used
(insertion, playback, recording or editing) in a personal computer DVD drive.
• When a DVD that has been used as above is used again in this recorder.
• When a DVD disc recorded in a DVD recorder of another manufacturer, or in a personal computer DVD drive
is used.
Some functions such as Library may not work with PC discs.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On DVD-R discs
Marks on DVD video discs
The following are examples of marks and the meanings.
Standards
DVD-R for General Ver.2.0 discs can be used for
recording and playback.
Discs compatible with 2X speed recording (labeled
Ver.2.1/2X etc.) and discs compatible with 4X speed
recording (labeled Ver.2.1/4X etc.) can also be used.
Select discs labeled “for video,” “for recording,” “120
min.” etc.
Mark
Meanings
Number of audio streams
recorded in the disc.
(2 streams such as English and
Japanese in this example.)
2
DVD-R for authoring Ver.1.1 cannot be used.
Recording conditions
Number of subtitle languages
recorded in the disc.
(2 subtitle languages are
recorded in this example.)
Images for which copying is prohibited or restricted
(copy once or copy prohibited) cannot be recorded.
Even if the disc is labeled as CPRM compatible, this
recorder can only be used to record copy-free
material.
2
3
Number of camera angles
recorded in the disc.
(3 camera angles are recorded in
this example.)
Recommended discs
Taiyo-Yuden 4X
Tested discs
Panasonic LM-RF120 (4.7GB/120 min.)
Pictures are recorded in the
standard picture shape
(4:3 aspect ratio).
4:3
LB
On DVD-RW discs
Standards
Pictures are recorded in the letter
box picture shape (4:3 aspect
ratio with horizontal black bars in
the top and bottom of pictures).
Discs labeled DVD-RW Ver.1.1 can be used.
Discs compatible with 2X speed recording (labeled
Ver.1.1/2X etc,) can also be used.
Select discs labeled “for video,” “for recording,” “120
min.” etc.
Pictures are recorded in the 16:9
wide picture shape.
TVs with 4:3 aspect ratio will
display them in the letter box
style.
16:9 LB
16:9 PS
Recording conditions
Images for which copying is prohibited or restricted
(copy once or copy prohibited) cannot be recorded.
Even if the disc is labeled as CPRM compatible, this
recorder can only be used to record copy-free
material.
Pictures are recorded in the 16:9
wide picture shape.
DVD-VR mode recording is not possible.
TVs with 4:3 aspect ratio will
display them in the pan scan style
(one or both sides of pictures
are cut).
Recommended discs*
JVC 2X
Note
• There are limitations on times of repeat recording on the
same disc.
Actual picture shape may vary
depending on the aspect ratio or
mode selection of the TV.
*Operation has been confirmed with recommended discs
and tested discs, but some other discs may not be
usable.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Compatible discs (Continued)
Structure of disc contents
On handling discs
Normally, DVD video discs are divided into titles, and the
titles are subdivided into chapters.
Do not touch the playback side of the disc.
VIDEO CDs/audio CDs are divided into tracks.
DVD video disc
Title 1
Title 2
Yes
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3
Playback side
Do not stick paper or tape to discs.
VIDEO CD / audio CD
Track 2 Track 3 Track 4
Track 1
Track 5
No
Title:
Divided contents of a DVD video disc.
Roughly corresponds to a story title in short
stories.
On cleaning discs
Chapter: Divided contents of a title. This corresponds
Fingerprints and dust on the disc cause picture and
sound deterioration. Wipe the disc from the center
outwards with a soft cloth. Always keep the disc clean.
to a chapter in a story.
Divided contents of a VIDEO CD or an audio
CD.
Track:
Each title, chapter, or track is assigned a number, which
is called “title number”, “chapter number”, or “track
number” respectively.
Yes
No
Some discs may not have these numbers.
When you record on the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc, one
recording will always equal one title.You can divide a title
into several chapters by marking borders in it to facilitate
scene search.
If you cannot wipe off the dust with a soft cloth, wipe
the disc lightly with a slightly moistened soft cloth and
finish with a dry cloth.
Do not use any type of solvent such as thinner,
benzine, commercially available cleaners or antistatic
spray for vinyl LPs. It may damage the disc.
On storing discs
Do not store discs in a place subject to direct sunlight
or near heat sources.
Do not store discs in places subject to moisture and
dust such as a bathroom or near a humidifier.
Store discs vertically in a case. Stacking or placing
objects on discs outside of their case may cause
warping.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Discs and purposes
The table shows main functions which are available on this recorder per disc category.
This will help you choose discs.
DVD-RAM disc
DVD-RW disc
DVD-R disc
Suitable for repeat use of the Suitable for saving data in
Suitable for saving data in
Characteristics on this
recorder
disc, and data storage for
video library. Copy once
contents can be recorded
using a compatible disc.
DVD-Video format to play on DVD-Video format to play on
compatible devices.
compatible devices.
You can erase recorded
contents to use the disc
repeatedly.
Once you execute DVD-
Video finalizing process on a
recorded disc so that it can
be played on other players,
you cannot make addition,
correction and deletion of
contents on the disc.
No preparatory steps
required, however initializing
is recommended.
Initialize the disc.
No preparatory steps
required.
For the first use
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Recording a TV program
Erasing recorded contents
If the disc has been executed Deleting contents cannot
DVD-Video finalizing
restore the disc space.
process, first cancel the
process then delete contents
After you execute DVD-
Video finalizing process on a
recorded disc, you cannot
delete contents of the disc.
.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Recording additional content
on a recorded disc
If the disc has been executed After you execute DVD-
DVD-Video finalizing
process, first cancel the
process then delete contents
Video finalizing process on a
recorded disc, you cannot
add contents to the disc.
.
Indexing recorded contents
Naming a title
Creating a thumbnail
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
After you execute DVD-Video
After you execute DVD-Video
finalizing process on a recorded finalizing process on a recorded
disc, you cannot name a title or disc, you cannot name a title or
create a thumbnail.
create a thumbnail.
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Collecting favorite scenes
(Playlist Editing)
Making a new title from a Playlist
containing favorite scenes
(Copy within the same disc)
Contents can be played on
any devices compatible with finalizing process on this
DVD-RAM discs. Follow the recorder. This process
instruction of the device to
play.
Execute DVD-Video
Execute DVD-Video
Playing contents recorded on
this recorder, on other devices
finalizing process on this
recorder. This process
makes the disc playable on
other compatible devices.
(Some models excepted.)
makes the disc playable on
other compatible devices.
(Some models excepted.)
Initialize the disc.
Initialize the disc.
–
When a message appears and
the loaded disc cannot be
used:
If it is still unusable, try to
execute DVD-RAM physical
format.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Index to Parts and Controls
See pages with arrows for details.
Front panel
1
2
3 4
5 6 7
8
9
10 11
12 13
14
15
16 17
18
19
20
21
22
* The above illustration displays the front panel with the cover open. See the following page on how to open or close the cover.
1 ON/STANDBY button
pages 20, 21
8
(STOP) button
page 35, 60
Turns the power on/restores the unit in the
standby mode.
Stops playback or recording.
9 PICTURE SEARCH (
Scans the picture backwards.
) button
page 64
page 64
2 Three mode button (HDD, TIMESLIP, DVD)
page 32, 55, 60, 62, 63
Selects recording/playback media.
10 PICTURE SEARCH (
) button
Scans the picture forward.
3 INPUT SELECT button
page 38
Pressing repeatedly selects between various input
sources.
11 (PLAY) button
page 60
Starts playback.
4 CHANNEL buttons
Selects the channel.
page 20, 33
12 ON/STANDBY indicator
page 20, 21
Displays the operational state of the recorder.
(This is not avaialble to select satellite channels
regardless of the IR control cable connection and
the set top box setting.)
13 Remote sensor
page 12 in “INSTALLATION
GUIDE”
5
6
7
(OPEN/CLOSE) button
Opens and closes the disc tray.
page 20
14 DV IN connector
page 136
Use this when recording from a digital video
camera.
(PAUSE) button
page 35, 60
Stops playback or recording momentarily.
15 INPUT jacks
page 37
Use this when recording from other input source
such as a VTR or a camcorder.
(REC) button
page 34
Starts recording.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16 Three mode indicator
page 32, 55, 60, 62, 63
To open or close the cover on the front panel
Indicates the selection by the three mode button.
Put your finger on the left edge of the cover and pull it
down to open.
17 Media indicator
Indicates the current media.
18 Operation Status Indicator (HDD)
Indicates the operation status of the HDD.
: Recording
: Playing
: Copying within the disc
Note
• Do not place a heavy object on the cover while it is
open. Doing so may damage the recorder.
19 HDD indicator
Illuminates in the HDD mode.
20 Operation Status Indicator (DVD)
Indicates the operation status of the DVD.
: Recording
: Playing
: Copying within the disc
21 Disc tray
page 20
Place a disc to play or record.
22 Front panel display
page 18
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Index to Parts and Controls (Continued)
Rear Panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 AC IN socket
page 15 in “INSTALLATION
7 AV1(AUDIO/VIDEO)IN/OUT socket
page 37
GUIDE”
• Use this socket when connecting the TV that has
the terminal in this shape.
Connects to the supplied power cord.
• Use this socket when connecting the video or
other equipment that has the terminal in this
shape.
2 Ventilation fan
3 RF IN (FROM ANT.) input socket
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”
page 14 in
8 CHANNEL CHANGE IR jack
page 20 in
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”
Connects to an aerial or satellite signal.
Connect the supplied IR control cable to control
cable/satellite channels according to timer
programs.
4 RF OUT (TO TV) output socket
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”
page 14 in
Connects the supplied coaxial cable to a TV.
9 DIGITAL BITSTREAM/PCM COAXIAL AUDIO
OUTPUT jack
page 22, 23, 24 in
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”
5 VIDEO OUTPUT, AUDIO OUTPUT jacks
page 16 in “INSTALLATION GUIDE”
Outputs video and audio signals to a connected
TV or amplifier.
Use this to connect the recorder to an audio
receiver equipped with a coaxial digital audio input
jack.
6 Component VIDEO OUTPUT jacks
page 17
in “INSTALLATION GUIDE”
Outputs video signals to a connected TV or
monitor.
Connects to a TV or monitor equipped with
component video jacks.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 DIGITAL BITSTREAM/PCM OPTICAL AUDIO
OUTPUT jack page 22, 23, 24 in
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”
Use this to connect the recorder to an audio
receiver equipped with an optical digital audio
input jack.
When connecting the optical digital cable,
remove the cap and fit the connector into the jack
firmly. When not using the jack, keep the cap
inserted to protect it from dust intrusion.
11 AV2(SAT/DECODER)IN/OUT socket
37
page
Use this socket when connecting the video or
other equipment that has the terminal in this
shape.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Index to Parts and Controls (Continued)
Remote control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
24
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
ENTER
34
35
36
12
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY
13
14
REC
QUICK MENU
37
38
39
40
15
16
17
47
51
52
53
54
55
VIDEO Plus+ EXTEND REC MODE TV CODE
T.SEARCH
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
48
49
DIMMER FL SELECT ZOOM
TV
P in P
1
2
3
41
42
43
44
45
18
19
20
21
CLEAR
PROGRESSIVE
4
5
6
DELETE
TV/VIDEO CHANNEL VOLUME INPUT SELECT
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
7
8
0
9
SETUP
ENTER
+
10
50
22
23
46
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
31
32
33
34
35
OPEN/CLOSE button
MENU button*1
page 20, 21
CONTENT MENU button
EDIT MENU button
page 55, 95
page 55, 64
page 108
TOP MENU button
page 61
page 70
page 71
SKIP button
page 65
3
4
ANGLE button
PICTURE SEARCH button
5
SUBTITLE button
ENTER button
PLAY button
page 55, 150
page 60
6
HDD button
page 32, 38, 55
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
7
TIMESLIP button
EASY NAVI button
LIBRARY button
REC MENU button
page 62, 63
page 23
QUICK MENU button
page 24, 82
8
button
page 150
page 35
page 81
page 90
9
page 140
page 40
STOP button
10
11
12
TIME BAR button
SLOW button
page 65
CHP DIVIDE button
FRAME/ADJUST button
page 40, 66
page 55, 150
P in P button
page 69
page 72
13 Direction buttons ( / / / )
43 ZOOM button
14
15
16
17
18
PAUSE buttton
REC button
page 35, 56
page 34
PROGRESSIVE buttton
page 17 in
page 38
44
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”
45
46
47
48
INPUT SELECT button
button
page 55
TV/DVR button
page 35
page 46
DISPLAY button
REMAIN button
page 80
page 27
page 19
VIDEO Plus+ button
EXTEND button
Number buttons
page 43, 45
page 46, 67
page 150
19 DIMMER button
20
49
FL SELECT button
page 19
50 SETUP button
21 Buttons for TV operation
page 52 in
51
52
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”
REC MODE button
page 34
22 SAT.CONT. button
SAT.MONI. button
page 19, 32
page 39
TV CODE button
page 52 in
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”
23
53
54
55
T.SEARCH button
CLEAR button
page 67
24 ON/STANDBY button
25 RETURN button*2
26 CHANNEL buttons
page 20, 21
page 67
page 50
DELETE button
page 20, 33
*1 MENU
Use this to display a menu screen that is recorded on
a DVD video disc.
Operate the menu screen as the same manner as
27 AUDIO button
page 73
page 32, 38, 60
DVD button
28
29
30
“Locating a title using the top menu (
page 61)”.
INSTANT SKIP button
INSTANT REPLAY button
page 64
page 64
A menu screen is not recorded on some discs.
*2 RETURN
Returns to the previous screen (the screen may be
specified depending on the disc).
Refer to the instructions of the disc.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Index to Parts and Controls (Continued)
Display
1 2 3 4
5
6
7 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
1 DUBBING indicator
Illuminates when copying.
8 Title indicator
Illuminates when a title number is displayed.
2 PBC indicator
9 TRK (Track) indicator
Illuminates when PBC function is “On” (
page
Illuminates when a track number is displayed.
156) and a PBC-controllable VIDEO CD is loaded.
3 Angle icon page 70
10 CHP (Chapter) indicator
Illuminates when playing a scene recorded with
multi angles.
Illuminates when a chapter number is displayed.
11 NICAM indicator
4 Program recording indicator
Illuminates when the recorder holds a timer
program.
Illuminates when “NICAM” (
“On” and while receiving stereo stereo/Mode I, II/
mono programmes of NICAM broadcasts.
page 158) is set to
5 Bit rate indicator
12 SAT indicator
Illuminates when displaying the bit rate selected
for recording, or when displaying the actual bit
rate.
See the next page.
13 PROGRESSIVE indicator
Illuminates when video signals are output in the
progressive format.
6 REMAIN (Remaining space) indicator
Illuminates when an available recording time is
displayed.
14 Picture quality mode indicator
page 161
The current picture quality mode lights up.
The modes are: MN (Manual)/SP (Standard Play)/
LP (Long Play)/SP+LP+MN (Auto)
7 VCD/CD indicator
VCD : Illuminates when a VIDEO CD is loaded.
CD : Illuminates when an audio CD is loaded.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dimming the display
Pressing the DIMMER button on the remote control changes the brightness of the display (normal/dimmed/off).
Switching the display
Every time you press the FL SELECT button, the display changes between the channel, title number, and time.
The display may not change, depending on the disc or recording conditions.
15 Channel indicator
SAT indicator and channel selection
Displays the current channel or other numbers
such as a title number, track number, bit rate or
input selection.
While the SAT indicator illuminates, you can select
channels of a connected satellite receiver from the
recorder.
(It is necessary to finish the connection and the
settings (
page 20, 45, INSTALLATION GUIDE).)
16 Multi display
Displays the current time, elapsed time, remaining
time, starting time of programmed recording, chapter
number or message, etc.
Each time you press the SAT.CONT. button, the SAT
indicator turns on and off.
17 Analog output level indicator
Displays the analog output level.
L+R: Stereo and bilingual (left (main) channel and
right (sub) channel)
L
R
: Left (main) channel
: Right (sub) channel
Off : Mono
Level indicator may not show exact sound level. It
only shows the average level.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Before operating this recorder
Is your recorder ready?
Loading a disc
• Refer to the supplied “INSTALLATION GUIDE”
manual and finish the necessary preparations.
• Turn on the connected equipment such as a TV or
audio system and select the input from the recorder.
Check disc compatibility beforehand (
and use a proper playable disc.
page 6, 7)
Caution
• Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray. Neglecting this
may cause serious personal injury. Keep a close watch on
children.
Turning the power on
• Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc.
(This owner’s manual instructions are based on
the assumption that all proper connections have
been completed and the TV is turned on.)
1 Open the disc tray.
Press ON/STANDBY on the front panel of the
recorder or on the remote control.
Press
on the front panel or the OPEN/CLOSE
button on the remote control.
ON/STANDBY button
button
ON/STANDBY indicator
ON/STANDBY button
CHANNEL buttons
OPEN/CLOSE button
When the power turns on, the ON/STANDBY indicator
changes from red (standby mode) to green (operation).
After a few seconds, a start-up screen appears.
The following icon appears at the top right corner of
the screen.
2 Insert a disc.
Disc without a cartridge
Insert with the playback side down.
e.g.
There are two kinds of disc size. Place a disc to fit
the guide. If a disc is out of the guide, it may result
in damage to the disc or malfunction.
Loading
When this icon disappears, the recorder is ready to
operate. If the disc drive contains a disc, it takes a
little longer to start up.
Place a disc in the
inside hollow.
Viewing TV channels through this recorder
After turning the power on, the recorder will output TV
channel signals to the connected TV (also in the stop
mode).
You can select a desired channel by pressing the
CHANNEL or the number buttons.
While the SAT indicator is on, channels of the
connected satellite receiver are selected. It is
necessary to finish the connection and the settings.
Refer to
page 20, 45, INSTALLATION GUIDE.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD-RAM disc with cartridge (TYPE1/TYPE2/TYPE4)
Single sided
Turn the printed side up, and insert the cartridge
into the tray frame following the direction of the
arrow on the cartridge.
Caution
• If the power fails or the power cord is disconnected from a
wall outlet while the recorder is in operation (ON/STANDBY
indicator lit in green), the HDD or a loaded disc may
become recording disabled. In such a case, executing an
initialization of the disc using the formatting function of the
recorder may refresh it. However, all contents stored on the
disc will be completely erased by this initialization process.
• This recorder may indicate alert messages with some
DVD-RAM discs right after insertion. If such a disc is used
for playback or recording on other equipment, all data in
the disc may be damaged and the disc will not be played.
By executing an initialization of the disc using the
formatting function of the recorder, the disc will become
operational.
Double sided
Turn the desired recording/playback side up, and
insert the cartridge into the tray frame following the
direction of the arrow on the cartridge.
• If the recorder freezes and does not respond at all, leave it
alone for about 15 minutes or longer. This may restore the
recorder. After the recorder has recovered, turn it off once
and turn it on again to use as usual. If the recorder is still
inoperable after more than 15 minutes have passed, press
and hold the ON/STANDBY button on the front panel or the
remote control for about 10 seconds or longer. The
recorder is forced to quit and the power turns off. Turn the
recorder on again and use it as usual. (This is an
emergency measure, which may cause losses and/or
damages of data. Avoid casual use of this measure. If you
try this while the recorder is working properly, especially
while the “Loading” or “Unloading” icon is flashing, it may
result in initializing of the HDD.) (This 15-minute measure
is available only when “Screen protector” is set to “On.”
3 Close the disc tray.
Press
on the front panel or the OPEN/CLOSE
button on the remote control.
Notes
• Use the button on the front panel or the remote control to
open and close the disc tray. Do not push or hold the disc
tray while it is moving. Doing so may cause the recorder to
malfunction.
• Do not insert a disc which is unplayable, or any object
other than a playable disc.
• Do not apply downforce to the disc tray. Doing so may
cause the recorder to malfunction.
• If the disc tray stops while closing, the mechanical
protection system of this recorder will open it. Do not force
it to close. Doing so may cause malfunction.
• If the disc tray will not open, turn the recorder off, and
(
page 159))
Note
• If there are any performance malfunctions of the HDD or
the DVD-RAM drive, immediately discontinue use of this
recorder, and disconnect the power cord from a wall outlet,
then contact your dealer. Continuous use of the recorder in
such a condition will aggravate the condition and result in
increased cost and repair time.
press the
button on the front panel or the OPEN/
CLOSE button on the remote control. This may turn the
recorder on and open the disc tray. If it still won’t open,
contact your nearest TOSHIBA dealer.
Disc tray lock
You can lock the disc tray.
Press and hold on the front panel or PAUSE on
the remote control for longer than about 3
seconds.
Turning the power off
To unlock, during stop press the button for longer than
about 3 seconds.
Press ON/STANDBY on the front panel of the
recorder or on the remote control.
The “Unloading” icon appears at the top right corner of
the screen, and the ON/STANDBY indicator turns red,
then the power turns off (Standby mode.)
Note
• Turning the power off also unlocks the disc tray.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Before operating this recorder (Continued)
Start-up/Shutdown (closing) icons
Status display
These icons are displayed at the top right corner of the
screen when startup or finishing. While they are
flashing, the recorder is operating as follows:
Each time you operate the recorder, the following
displays appear on the TV screen to indicate the
status of the recorder.
Status display
e.g.
Start-up, reading a disc, finishing the
recording
Loading
Unloading a disc, finishing the
operation
Un
Main on-screen displays
(Depending on the disc, some of these may not
appear.)
loading
: Playback
: Pause
: Stop
Opening a disc tray
Open
: Fast-forward
: Fast-reverse
: Forward skip*
: Reverse skip*
: Forward slow-motion
: Reverse slow-motion
Closing a disc tray
Close
x1/2
x1/2
: Forward frame by frame playback
: Reverse frame by frame playback
: Recording
: Recording pause
: When title playback is completed
Title
End
: Instant skip
: Instant replay
Chapter : Chapter division
Divide
: Forward skip by 1/20
: Reverse skip by 1/20
* Accompanied with the followings:
:
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Title number/title name and chapter number/
chapter name
:
DVD-VIDEO
Title number and chapter number
:
VCD
CD
Track number
Notes
• To disable the status display, set “On screen display”
page 159) to “Off.”
• You can add the current status of the settings to this
display. See page 80.
(
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Key operation- EASY NAVI & QUICK MENU
The EASY NAVI button opens the “EASY NAVI Main Menu”, a main gate to the functions of this recorder.
From this menu, you can access the desired functions while viewing a current picture.
Additionally, the QUICK MENU button provides you a sub-menu of the current function.
EASY NAVI
Press EASY NAVI.
Sound is muted and the following GUI appears. (Actual displays vary depending on operational status.)
Appears when the finder shows
the current broadcast.
Disc
e.g.
EASY
HDD
Main Menu
NAVI
:
TV 1ch
:
:
005 2004/04/03 19 00
Ch
2
Recorded title
last selected
(00:54:30)
Original
Finder
Cursor
HDD/DVD
HDD
Time Slip
EASY NAVI
ENTER
TR
Play Time 00:10:15
Timer Recording
Play Contents
DV Recording
Dubbing
Functions
/
/
/
Edit Title Name
Create Thumbnail
Setup
Delete Title
Format (RAM/RW)
Finalize (R/RW)
PLAY
STOP
Operating the finder (For the HDD, DVD-RAM discs, DVD-R/RW
discs recorded on this recorder and not finalized yet)
1) When the cursor is on the finder, press
/
.
You can view thumbnails of recorded contents.
• You can select the drive by pressing the HDD or DVD button.
2) When you find a desired content, press PLAY or ENTER.
The content is played.
• Pressing the ENTER button enlarges the finder’s playback picture to
the full of the screen.
• You can change playback speed. See
page 64.
3) To stop, press STOP.
A current channel broadcast appears. (“TV:xxch” accompanies.)
•
Pressing the REC button starts recording. On recording, see page 25.
Item selection
Press
/
/
/
to select an item, then press ENTER.
(Unavailable features are grayed out.)
page
Item
Function
40
55
Timer Recording
Play Contents
Dubbing
A list of timer programs appears.
Recorded contents are listed in a thumbnail view.
You can access a menu to dub the current content.
106
The setting menu for recording contents from equipment
connected to the DV terminal appears.
DV Recording
Delete Title
136
50
You can delete the current content.
Operate according to the message.
Edit Title Name
30
An on-screen keyboard appears.
Create Thumbnail
100
You can change the thumbnail picture.
You can execute the DVD-Video finalizing process on the
loaded disc.
Finalize (R/RW)
132
Format (RAM/RW)
Setup
28
You can format the loaded disc.
A setup menu appears.
150
(Continued)
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Key operation - EASY NAVI & QUICK MENU (continued)
To exit the EASY NAVI
Press EASY NAVI again.
Quick Menu operation
To access various optional functions of this recorder,
open the Quick Menu. The Quick Menu displays a list
of selections relevant to your current mode.
Note
• For a disc other than the specified one, the finder cannot
be operated. To play the disc, exit the EASY NAVI then
press the PLAY button, or select the “Play Contents”
function.
• If a loaded disc contains NTSC signals, more functions will
be unavailable.
Opening a Quick Menu
1) Press QUICK MENU.
The following menu (“Quick Menu”) appears.
(Actual selections vary depending on operational
status.)
e.g.
Quick Menu
Restart title
Title information
Bit rate
Special playback mode
Exit
2) Press
ENTER.
/
to select an item, then press
To exit the Quick Menu
Press QUICK MENU again.
Alternatively
Select “Exit” with
/
, then press ENTER.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hint on reading this manual
The following icons show the playable discs for each
function described on this instruction manual.
HDD
: HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-RW
DVD-R
: DVD-RAM disc
: DVD-RW disc
: DVD-R disc
: DVD video disc
Recording
Recording variations for many types of programmes or
situations.
DVD-VIDEO
VCD : VIDEO CD
Before recording
Recording a TV programme
Recording an external source
CD
: Audio CD
(For CD containing JPEG or MP3/WMA files,
see
page 76, 78.)
Programing a recording (REC
MENU)
VIDEO Plus+ Recording
Others
Most instructions are based on remote control operation,
unless otherwise noted. You can use the buttons on the
remote control and those on the main unit as well when
they have the same function.
If copy protection signal is detected during
recording on this recorder, the recording
automatically pauses and a message appears. In
this case, the PAUSE button cannot release the
recording. (It is possible to end the recording by
pressing the STOP button.) If the copy protection
signal continues, the recording will terminate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
Before recording
Please be sure to read this critical background information prior to making a recording.
This recorder is equipped with a built-in HDD. Conventional video cassette recorders have required
tapes to record, while this recorder enables recording on the HDD whenever you want, without
selecting an available tape or confirming its recording time or tape remaining.
Further, the DVD-RAM drive on this recorder can record on a DVD-RAM/RW/R disc in the same way as
a tape. You can also copy contents recorded on the HDD to a DVD-RAM/RW/R disc to create your
own library.
Is your recorder ready?
Note
• This recorder records on a DVD-RAM disc if it complies
with DVD-RAM standard Version 2.0 or 2.1. However, you
may not record on some DVD-RAM discs that have
complicated contents (often, to protect the recorded data).
When you select a DVD-RAM discs that has already been
recorded, check that the disc is suitable for recording or the
remaining time of the disc is displayed. It is recommended
to use a new DVD-RAM disc for an important recording.
Before recording a TV program on this recorder,
insure that channels you want to record are correctly
tuned in on this recorder.
If not tuned in, read the separate “INSTALLATION
GUIDE” volume again, and confirm all the necessary
connections and settings have been done.
Also, insure the clock is set precisely for program
recording. Set the clock using the “Initial settings”
menu (
page 30, INSTALLATION GUIDE).
Note on recording on a DVD-RW disc
Confirm disc compatibility and prepare an available
Disc initializing
DVD-RW disc to record on (
page 6, 9).
Whenever you use a new DVD-RAM/RW disc on this
recorder, be sure to initialize the disc. For DVD-RAM
disc, initialization is indispensable to the database
system of this recorder.
Normally, the HDD does not need to be formatted. If
the HDD does not work normally due to a problem,
format the HDD for possible recovery. Once you
format the HDD, all the recorded titles and Library
information are deleted. Before formatting, be sure to
write Library information to a DVD-RAM disc and
check any titles to be deleted.
Some discs may need to be initialized for use on the
recorder. A message will appear asking you to execute
disc initializing. Follow the procedure displayed on-
screen for initialize the DVD-RW disc compatible with
this recorder.
Some DVD-RW discs initialized on a PC may not be
usable.
To play a DVD-RW disc recorded on this recorder on
other devices, finalize the DVD-RW disc on this
DVD-RW discs can be emptied by initializing.
DVD-R discs can be used on this recorder without
initializing.
recorder. (
page 132)
The finalization disables the disc’s rewritability. To
rewrite a finalized DVD-RW disc, cancel the
finalization (
page 135).
For details of initialization of DVD-RAM/RW discs, see
page 28.
• On DVD-RW discs recorded on other devices, you
cannot execute DVD-Video finalize process or
cancel the finalize process, or add recordings on
this recorder.
• You cannot rewrite or edit a DVD-RW disc if
recorded in DVD-VR mode.
• DVD-RW discs which are recorded on other
devices and not finalized yet, cannot be read on this
recorder. Do not rush to initialization. Check that the
contents can be erased or not.
If an initialized DVD-RAM disc is still unusable, it may
become usable by executing “DVD-RAM physical
format” in the “Management settings” menu.
For “DVD-RAM physical format”, see
page 29.
Note on recording on a DVD-RAM disc
Confirm disc compatibility and prepare an available
DVD-RAM disc to record on ( page 6, 8).
Some discs may need to be formatted for use on this
recorder. A message will appear asking you to execute
disc formatting. Follow the procedure displayed on-
screen to format the DVD-RAM disc compatible with
this recorder.
Some DVD-RAM discs formatted on a PC may not be
usable.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programmed recording and operational status
The recorder gives priority to programmed recordings
in every operating mode. Even if the recorder is
playing, recording or editing, or even in standby mode,
at a starting time of a programmed recording the
recorder will make itself ready or stop those
operations and start the recording.
Note on recording on a DVD-R disc
Confirm disc compatibility and prepare an available
DVD-R disc to record on (
page 6, 9).
To play a DVD-R disc recorded on this recorder on
other devices, finalize the DVD-R disc on this
recorder. (
page 132)
However, “Creating a DVD-Video” (
“DVD-Video finalizing process” (
page 122) and
page 132)
The finalization permanently disables the disc’s
writeability. (Cancelling the finalization is not possible.)
• DVD-Video finalize process cannot be cancelled if
once executed on a DVD-R disc.
operations may have priority over programmed
recordings.
• On DVD-R discs recorded on other devices, you
cannot execute DVD-Video finalize process or add
recordings on this recorder.
• DVD-R discs with the method of ”DVD-Video
Creation” have been alreadly executed the DVD-
Video finalize process. Therefore, they cannot be
added the contents.
When the programmed settings overlap
Before the first recording is completed, the second
programme is scheduled to begin recording. When
using a DVD-RAM disc, the recording of the previous
programme stops 15 seconds before the next
programme starts. (If you have been recording over 8
hours on the same drive, the current recording stops
approximately 2 minutes before the next programme
starts.)
If you want to record contents which will be copied
to a DVD-R/RW disc later on
When using a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc, the recording
of the previous programme stops about 2 minutes
before the next programme starts, to complete data
process. In this 2 minutes, you cannot operate the
loaded DVD-R or DVD-RW disc.
See
page 36.
To check space remaining on a disc
1) Press the REMAIN button.
The current capacity per disc is displayed at the
bottom of the screen. The current capacity of the
selected drive is displayed on the front panel display.
On a programmed recording across the change-
over of Daylight-saving time
• When the clock gains across Daylight-saving time
during a programmed recording, it means that the
recording completion time is consequently set one-
hour earlier. In this case, set the programmed
recording one-hour longer in advance. If not set
accordingly, the programmed recording stops one-
hour shorter.
2) After checking the capacity, press the button
again to turn off the display.
Note
• You can also check the capacity of the disc by selecting
“Disc budget calculation” from the Quick Menu within the
REC MENU (
page 44).
• When the clock loses across Daylight-saving time
during a programmed recording, it means that the
recording completion time is consequently set one-
hour later. In this case, as the programmed
recording continues one-hour longer, delete
unnecessary chapters by chapter dividing after the
completion of recording.
When “HDD recording is not possible due to...”
appears
The HDD is full. To record new content, delete
unnecessary titles or transfer some content to a DVD-
RAM disc.
Notes
• The “Loading” icon appears in the top right of the screen after recording. This indicates that the unit is executing
the final recording process (writing managing information). Operations other than changing channels cannot be
done until this icon disappears. The time for executing this process differs depending on the recording time or
capacity of the disc.
• Note that all recording content may be deleted if the unit is disconnected from a wall outlet, or a power failure
occurs, during recording.
• If a power failure occurs within 5 minutes prior to the programmed recording start time, the programmed recording
may not be executed.
• A programmed recording may not be executed correctly if scheduled when Daylight-Saving time starts or ends.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
Before recording (Continued)
Initializing a DVD-RAM/RW disc (Logical Format)
Be sure to read this section prior to using a DVD-RAM/RW disc on this recorder for the first time.
For DVD-R, initializing is not necessary.
A disc should be initialized in the following cases: (The
recorder may display a message to request you to do
so.)
e.g.
Quick Menu
Bit rate
Disc information
DVD format
Special playback mode
Disc management
DVD video compatibility
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
DVD-Video:CHP create
AV record quality
Exit
e.g.
When you use a DVD-RAM/RW disc on this recorder
for the first time.
If data fragments produced by repeated recording or
erasing have accumulated.
If a disc error has occurred.
When you want to record on a DVD-RAM disc for PC.
(
page 8)
3) Press
/
to select “DVD format,” then press
ENTER.
Initializing formats a disc logically and insures that it will
perform to its full capability. However, this erases all data
on the disc, so make sure that it does not matter if data
on the disc is erased whenever you initialize a disc.
e.g.
DVD format
How to initialize a disc
To initialize a DVD-RAM disc, load it in the recorder.
Edit
Edit
Disc Number
Disc Name
0
0
1
–
See
page 20 for loading a disc.
Start
Cancel
Format
0
%
1) During stop, press QUICK MENU.
The following menu appears. (The actual contents
depends on the operational status of the recorder.)
Numbering a disc
The recorder automatically numbers discs when
e.g.
initializing. However, you can assign a desired number
(using 3 digits) and designate sides A and B on a double-
sided disc. (DVD-RW discs cannot be numbered.)
Quick Menu
Bit rate
Special playback mode
Disc management
DVD video compatibility
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
DVD-Video:CHP create
AV record quality
Exit
(1) Press the
/
buttons to select “Edit” of “Disc
Number” then press the ENTER button.
(2) Press the
(3) Press the
/
/
buttons to select a digit.
buttons to shift.
(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3).
(5) Press the ENTER button.
Naming a disc
You can name a disc.
(1) Press the
/
buttons to select “Edit” of “Disc
2) Press
/
to select “Disc management,” then
Name,” then press the ENTER button.
The character input window appears.
(2) Enter a disc name following the procedure of
press ENTER.
A sub-menu appears on the right side.
“Entering characters” (
page 30).
(3) Press the button to eliminate the window.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4) Press
/
to select “Start,” then press ENTER.
1) During stop, press SETUP.
2) Press to select “Management settings”
/
e.g.
then press ENTER.
e.g.
DVD format
Entire disc contents excluding
library data will be erased
if disc is formatted. Proceed?
Management settings
Genre setting
Eco. mode
Off
Off
HDD auto stop
All HDD titles delete
HDD format
Start
Cancel
DVD-RAM physical format
Software version
DVD drive software
Format
0
%
5) Press
/
to select “Start,” then press ENTER.
3) Press
/
to select “DVD-RAM physical
Initialization starts.
format,” then press ENTER.
e.g.
4) Press
/
to select “Yes,” then press ENTER
to execute.
DVD format
Warning: It will take approximately
70 minutes to format a 4.7GB DVD
and all data will be erased. Confirm
DVD
Formatting
t
hat timer programing is not
scheduled. Proceed?
Yes
No
Format
18%
To cancel, select “No”, then press the ENTER
button.
When initialization is completed, the setup window
disappears.
5) Read the message, and press
/
to select
“Yes” or “No”, then press ENTER.
Notes
DVD-RAM physical format
• The physical format process may fail if executed to a dirty
DVD-RAM disc. Also, the disc may be difficult to record,
even if it finished. Before executing DVD-RAM physical
format process, be sure to confirm the disc is not dirty.
Clean it if necessary. If the disc has scratches or dust
beyond cleaner’s efficacy, do not execute DVD-RAM
physical format process on the disc.
Physical formatting is a simple execution for a disc which
cannot be used or read (or which is becoming hard to
read). It may refresh such a disc for recording and
playback. (There is no guarantee that all such discs will
be recovered.)
“DVD-RAM logical format” process only rewrites certain
data on file system and management information,
however, “DVD-RAM physical format” rewrites all data on
a disc, therefore it takes a much longer time to complete.
For a 4.7GB single sided DVD-RAM, about 70 minutes
will be necessary. While processing, all recorder
operations and functions including program recording will
not work until the process is finished. Also this process
erases all data stored on the DVD-RAM disc.
• The following DVD-RAM discs require physical formatting:
–A disc which is not formatted correctly.
–The disc which has errors during writing because of dirt
on the disc, and cannot be further recorded, or cannot
initialize normally.
• You need to start physical formatting from the first step
again when you use a failed disc.
• Physical formatting does not work if the disc contains a lot
of voids beyond the limitation of this recorder.
• If an error occurs in physical formatting, “ERR-01” appears
in the front panel display. To turn off the message, press
the DISPLAY button on the remote control.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
Before recording (Continued)
Entering characters
Estimated end of the
first line on the
CONTENT MENU.
e.g.
CONTENT
Estimated limit of
Characters displayable
on the CONTENT
MENU.
Title information
MENU
Cursor
An entered character
will appear here.
Chapter 003
The character being
selected appears.
-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
=
/
’
Language
English
Spanish
French
German
Italian
q w e r t y u i o p [ ]
a s d f g h j k l :
z x c v b n m , . /
BkSp
Delete
etc...
Space Space Space Clear All
CLEAR
DELETE BkSp
Caps Lock
Save
All Clear
Space
Return
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
Select
Input
Direct(0-9)
-
:
Cursor
/
,
Operation guide
.
;
#
Operation guidance of the remote control
To enter the character, normally use the direction
buttons on the remote. About the other
Switching a language
Before entering a character, move a cursor to the
language selection area by pressing the buttons.
Then press the buttons to select a language,
then press the ENTER button.
/
/
/
/
buttons to be used are shown on the operation guide.
/
: Shifts a cursor.
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
: Enters the number.
DELETE
CLEAR
: Erases one character immediately to the left
side of the cursor.
: Erases all the characters on the input column.
: Caps Lock
: Saves the changes on the input column and
returns to the previous screen.
: Cancels the changes on the input column and
returns to the previous screen.
: Enters a space.
/
,
-
.
;
#
: Enters a symbol.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering characters
The cursor may be followed by unwanted characters.
You can erase them if necessary by either of the
following measures:
Erasing characters
• Erasing all the characters on the writing board
Select “Clear All” by pressing the
/
/
/
buttons,
then press the ENTER button.
Alternatively, open the lid of the remote control and
press the CLEAR button.
• Erasing one character before the cursor
Select “BkSp” by pressing the
/
/
/
buttons,
then press the ENTER button.
Alternatively, open the lid of the remote control and
press the DELETE button.
(1) Press the button to select an input mode.
(2) Press the
/
/
/
buttons to select a character,
then press the ENTER button.
The selected character is input on the cursor.
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) to enter characters.
(4) When finished, press
to save the characters.
The characters you entered appears.
Notes
• You can enter up to 64 characters.
• When unnecessary information appears, or when you want
to alter the input character, press the CLEAR button to
erase all, or press the DELETE button to erase an
unnecessary character.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Recording a TV programme
To record a TV programme currently being broadcast, follow the procedures of this chapter.
Preparation
• When you record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc, load it into the recorder.
- Load a disc which has sufficient space available to record the programme.
- Make sure the loaded disc is not write-protected.
• If you record on a DVD-R or a DVD-RW disc, set “DVD compatible mode” (
(Mode II)”. In DVD-R/RW recording, “Off” setting is regarded as “On (Mode I)”.
• If you record on a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc, set “Aspect ratio(video mode)” (
sources.
page 162) to “On (Mode I)” or “On
page 162) according to recording
Press HDD or DVD to select a media to record
on.
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
1
DVD
MENU
RETURN
HDD : To record on the HDD.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
DVD : To record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc.
HDD
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
DVD
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select a
recording source.
2
ENTER
Each time you press the button, the indicator alternates.
INPUT SELECT
Ch:
L:
To record a TV programme with recorder
tuner.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
To record a source connected to the INPUT
jacks on the front panel (
page 37).
QUICK MENU
AV1:
AV2:
L-U:
To record a source connected to the AV1
socket on the rear panel ( page 37).
To record a source connected to the AV2
socket on the rear panel ( page 37).
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
To record pictures currently played (
116).
page
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
To record a satellite programme, press the SAT.CONT.
button to turn on the SAT indicator. The input you have
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
set (
For details, see
page 45, INSTALLATION GUIDE) is selected.
page 19.
SAT.CONT.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the number buttons to select a channel
to record.
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
3
DVD
MENU
RETURN
The CHANNEL buttons (
/
) are also available.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
1
4
2
5
3
6
• While the SAT indicator is on, channels of the
connected satellite receiver are selected.
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
7
8
0
9
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press QUICK MENU to display the Quick
Menu. (If you want to use the default setting for “AV record
4
quality,” skip to step 8.)
ENTER
QUICK MENU
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY
R
R
E
EC
C
QUICK MENU
Press
/
to select “AV record quality,” then
press ENTER.
5
VIDEO Plus+ EXTEND REC MODE TV CODE
T.SEARCH
ENTER
1
2
3
CLEAR
4
5
6
DELETE
7
8
0
9
Press
/
to select a media to be recorded,
SETUP
ENTER
+10
then press ADJUST to select the setting
number.
6
e.g.
AV record quality
Setting 1
– – –
DVD
HDD
Manual 6.6 L-PCM
Custom setting
ENTER
SP 4.6
D/M1
Open the lid.
Setting
Mode
Manual
SP
Rate Audio quality
1
2
6.6
4.6
2.2
6.0
3.2
L-PCM
D/M1
3
4
5
LP
D/M1
Manual
Manual
D/M2
R
D/M1
Total recording time: 71min.
(with 4.7 GB unused)
See
page 41 for details on “Mode”, “Rate” and
“Audio quality”.
(Continued)
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
Recording a TV programme (Continued)
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
Press ENTER.
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
7
8
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
The menu disappears.
ENTER
ENTER
Press REC.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
Recording starts.
REC
QUICK MENU
Selecting the recording mode
Before recording, you can select the setting of picture and sound quality. During stop mode, press the REC MODE
button. By pressing the button repeatedly, you can select one from 5 settings of “AV record quality” appearing in
the front panel display.
Notes
• During recording, you cannot change the recording parameters, such as modes, channels, etc.
• The number of titles cannot exceed 99 for a DVD-RAM/RW/R disc or 396 for the HDD.
• One continuous recording cannot exceed in any case 8 hours. Recording automatically stops at 8 hours.
• During normal recording, you can set the programmed recording using the REC MENU.
• You cannot start recording immediately before a programmed recording starts.
• For recorded sound, see
page 74.
• During monaural sound recording, the same sound is recorded on both the left and right channels.
• When “Audio” is set to “L-PCM”, multi-channel sound is recorded as stereo sound. When playing this recorded sound, you
will hear NICAM Mode I and NICAM Mode II sounds simultaneously. Press the AUDIO button to select a desired sound.
•
When “DVD compatible mode” is set to “On (Mode I)” or “On (Mode II)”, the unit records the same sounds on both the left
and right channels when receiving monaural sound. When receiving the NICAM Mode I/Mode II sound, the selected sound,
Mode I or Mode II, is recorded on both the left and right channels
• Depending on the disc condition, pressing the REC button may take a longer time to start recording.
When a starting time of a programmed recording comes, a recording in execution is stopped and the programmed recording
.
•
starts. If you do not want to stop the recording, cancel the timer program before it starts
.
• Even if you set “Aspect ratio(video mode)” (
page 162) to “16:9”, images are recorded in 4:3 aspect ratio when using a
DVD-R or DVD-RW disc with “Rate” set to “1.4” (Mbps).
• Be careful of a programmed recording across the change-over of Daylight-saving time (
page 27).
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To stop recording
Press STOP.
To record and play at the same time
To start recording while playing a disc
Stop playback, then select the other disc by
pressing the HDD or DVD button, and start
recording on that disc.
To play a disc while recording on another disc
Select the disc that is not being recorded by
pressing the HDD or DVD button, and start
playback on the disc.
To pause recording (to omit an unnecessary
portion)
During recording, press PAUSE.
To resume recording, press it again.
Note
Note
• During a dubbing job, the unoccupied drive is available for
recording or playback, however, cannot perform a function
which records and plays simultaneously.
• Pausing recording automatically creates a new chapter
division at that point.
To set an end time of a recording which is in
progress
To change a TV channel to be recorded
1) During recording, press PAUSE.
1) During recording, press QUICK MENU.
Recording pauses.
The Quick Menu appears.
2) Press CHANNEL to change the channel.
3) Press PAUSE to resume recording.
2) Press
ENTER .
The display changes as follows:
/
to select “End time” then press
e.g.
:
13
End time
2
To view a TV programme while recording
another
1) Start recording on this recorder.
2) Press the TV/DVR button.
3) Press
/
to select an item then press
3) Using the channel selector of the TV, select a
desired channel on the TV.
ADJUST to change the value.
4) Press ENTER.
If you press the TV/DVR button again, you will
go back to the display that you are recording.
Notes
• By setting an end time, it is memorized as a programmed
one, and the indicator in the front panel display
illuminates to indicate that the recorder holds a timer
program of recording.
• The programmed end time must be set for 5 minutes later
than the current time.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
Recording a TV programme (Continued)
To play a recorded title while recording another
on the same disc (Recorded Title Play)
HDD
DVD-RAM
During recording, you can play a title recorded on the
same disc.
1) While recording, press CONTENT MENU.
2) Press
/
/
/
to select a desired title, then
press the ENTER.
Playback of the selected title starts.
Pressing the STOP button stops playback, and the
content currently recorded returns. If you press the
PLAY button, playback resumes from the location
you last stopped.
Notes
• The playback picture may appear after a delay of several
seconds.
• While you are using this function, the following operations/
functions are not available.
- Programmed playback (repeat playback, intro scan etc.)
- Editing (Playlist programming, dubbing, title/chapter
naming, title thumbnail setting, etc.)
• This function is not available at a 10 minutes overlapped
portion of the relay recording or A-B recording (
48).
page
• Depending on the data condition, playback may pause.
• During a dubbing job, this function is not available.
When recording contents which will be copied
to a DVD-RW/R disc later on
Before recording, set “DVD compatible mode” (
page 162) to “On”.
Each timer program must to be set its “DVD
compatible mode” from the Quick Menu.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Recording an external source
You can record programmes from connected equipment on the HDD or a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc.
Connect according to A or B.
A: Using the AV socket on the rear of the recorder
For recording from a digital
video camera recorder, etc.
connected to the DV input
terminal on the front panel, see
page 136, “DV recording.”
AV1(AUDIO/VIDEO)IN/OUT (AV1)
To AV socket
Rear of the
recorder
External equipment
To video
output jack
To audio
output jacks
AV2(SAT/DECODER)IN/OUT (AV2)
B: Using the input jacks on the front of the recorder
Audio cable
Video cable
White
Red
Yellow
• To record a clearer picture, use the
S video jack.
The S-VIDEO jack has priority over
the VIDEO (yellow) jack.
INPUT (Line)
Preparation
• When you record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc, load it into the recorder.
– Load a disc which has sufficient remaining space to record the programme.
– Make sure the loaded disc is not write-protected.
Notes
• Even if a source of high quality sound track such as DVD audio is recorded with this recorder, the sound quality becomes
regular audio CD’s one. Refer to the instructions of the connected equipment.
• When you record an external source onto a DVD-R/RW disc or a contents which will be copied to a DVD/R/RW disc later on,
set the connected equipment to output sound you want to record (if selectable such as multiplex broadcasting), as the
recorder records sounds of external source in the stereo type onto a DVD-R/RW disc, neglecting the setting of “DVD
compatible mode” (
page 162).
• DVD-R/RW discs cannot record contents with copy restriction signal embedded (copy-protected or copy once contents),
DVD-RAM discs can record copy once contents.
• Some satellite programmes via a connected tuner may contain both 4:3 pictures and 16:9 pictures. DVD-R/RW discs cannot
record such contents, under restriction of DVD-Video standard. To record them, use the HDD or DVD-RAM discs.
(Continued)
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
Recording an external source (Continued)
Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly so that “L,”
“AV1” or “AV2” appears on the front panel
display, corresponding to the input in which
the device is connected.
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
1
2
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
Each time you press the button, the indicator changes.
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INPUT SELECT
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
L: To record pictures from equipment connected to
the INPUT jacks on the front panel.
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
AV1: To record pictures from equipment connected to
the AV1 socket on the rear panel.
AV2: To record pictures from equipment connected to
the AV2 socket on the rear panel.
ENTER
L-U: To record pictures currently played (
page 116).
To record a satellite programme, press the SAT.CONT.
button to turn on the SAT indicator. The input you have
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
set (
For details, see
page 45, INSTALLATION GUIDE) is selected.
page 19.
QUICK MENU
Press HDD or DVD to select a recording
media.
HDD : To record on the HDD.
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DVD : To record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc.
HDD
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
DVD
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Start playback of the source content on the
connected equipment.
3
4
Press REC of this recorder to start recording.
SAT.CONT.
REC
When recording is completed, press STOP.
5
STOP
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes on recording from a connected VCR or camcorder
Check the condition of the source equipment before playing.
Set the equipment in good condition, e.g. clean the head or adjust the tracking, etc. to obtain optimum playback.
Bad condition may produce noises in playback. These noises may be detected as copy protection signals,
resulting in stop of recording on this recorder.
Play a source in an usual mode. Avoid using any correcting or enhancing features, as they may add signals
which can be detected as copy protection signals.
Source quality or tape condition beyond adjustments on the source equipment may stop a recording on this
recorder.
Do not operate the source equipment during recording on this recorder.
Operations such as pausing, resuming, fast-forwarding (CUE) and fast-reversing (REVIEW), etc. may produce
noises, which may be detected as copy protection signals. Therefore, first start playback on the source
equipment to confirm that the desired source can be played properly, and then start recording on this recorder.
Do not operate the source equipment during recording. After completing the desired scene, stop the recording on
the recorder, and then stop the playback on the source equipment. Delete unnecessary scenes using editing
functions (
page 118). If you want to operate the source equipment during recording, pause or stop the
recording. After operating the source equipment, resume the recording as above.
When recording from a camcorder
Follow the above notes. Be sure to power the camcorder by its AC adapter, not batteries. If batteries are used,
the recording may be finished on the way.
Satellite monitor function
• To view a satellite programme while recording a TV programme
1) Start recording on this recorder.
2) Press the SAT.MONI. button.
3) Select a desired satellite channel.
• To view a satellite programme while the recorder is in the playback or stop mode
1) Press the SAT.MONI. button.
2) Select a desired satellite channel.
Notes
• Pressing the SAT.MONI. button again ends the satellite monitor function.
• While the satellite monitor function is working, “SATMON” is displayed on the front panel display.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Programing a recording (REC MENU)
Use the REC MENU to program a recording. It will take less time to prepare, as it provides all necessary
information for recording, including estimated disc space remaining.
For more information, see “Before recording” (
Be careful when you program a recording across the change-over of Daylight-saving time (
page 26).
page 27).
During stop, press REC MENU.
OPEN/CLOSE
1
DVD
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
The “REC MENU Timer Programing” appears.
e.g.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
RECTimer Programing
REC MENU
4/3 (Sa)19:00
1/
1
MENU
CH
Date
Start
End
Media Mode Rate Audio Disc
Exec
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
D/M1
--- ------- --:-- --:--
SP
4.6
HDD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
Press ENTER.
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
2
“CH” is ready for setting.
e.g.
RECTimer Programing
4/3 (Sa)19:00
1/
1
MENU
ENTER
ENTER
CH
Date
Start
End
Media Mode Rate Audio Disc
Exec
D/M1
2
------- -- -- -- --
SP
4.6
HDD
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY
Select an item by pressing / , then press
ADJUST ( ) to set the item.
/
3
R
R
E
EC
C
QUICK MENU
e.g.
RECTimer Programing
4/3 (Sa)19:00
Media Mode Rate Audio Disc
1/
1
MENU
CH
Date
Start
End
00
Exec
ENTER
(
)
D/M1
4
4/10 Sa
7
00
8
4.6
DVD SP
VIDEO Plus+ EXTEND REC MODE TV CODE
T.SEARCH
• Refer to the setting items on the next page.
• You can also set the item by pressing the
/
buttons.
R
1
2
3
• “CH” can be input by the number buttons.
CLEAR
To select channels of the connected satellite receiver, first press
the SAT.CONT. button so that “S” appears in “CH”, then select
the channels (1-999).The number buttons are also available.
Be sure to keep the satellite receiver powered on.
4
5
6
DELETE
7
8
0
9
SETUP
ENTER
+
10
When complete, press ENTER.
4
5
To programme another recording, press the button to
move to the next line, then repeat steps 2 to 4.
ENTER
Press REC MENU to exit.
Open the lid.
CLEAR
Your programme is entered.
• If you want to turn off the power, press the power
button.
REC MENU
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting items
A timer program with this mark will be executed, To disengage, remove
this indicator.
√
Exec
1-99, L, AV1, AV2
Select a channel you want to record.
CH
(While “L”, “AV1” or “AV2” is selected, the number buttons are not
available to select channels.)
Specified date (from today to 2
month later)
Select a date of a TV programme you want to record.
Date
Every Sunday to Saturday, Monday
to Thursday, Monday to Friday,
Monday to Saturday, everyday.
Enter a starting time of recording. (An initial setting is 10 minutes later.)
You can also use the number buttons under the lid.
0:00 - 23:59
0:00 - 23:59
Start*
End*
Enter an end time. (Set the timer to begin recording no sooner than 2
minutes past the current time. Recording must not exceed 8 hours.)
You can also use the number buttons under the lid.
DVD
HDD
A–B
When you record on a DVD-RAM/RW/R disc.
When you record on the HDD.
Media
When you use A – B (double-side) recording (
page 48). “Mode” is
automatically set to “Auto”.
SP
LP
Standard setting of recording time and picture quality. (Not applicable
when “L-PCM” is selected.)
For longer recording, but inferior to “SP” in picture quality. (Not
applicable when “L-PCM” is selected.)
MN(Manual)
Auto
Customized setting of rate (bit rate).
Mode
To set a rate automatically according to the remaining volume of the
disc. (If the disc does not have room for the TV programme, the
programme cannot be recorded to the end.)
When you select an HDD, the recorder records for a length of time
corresponding to that of a blank DVD-RAM disc (4.7GB). Not
applicable to a recording for 2.5 hours or longer.
1.4, 2.0-9.2
Not applicable when “SP”, “LP” or “Auto” is selected. You can set a
rate at intervals of 0.2Mbps from 2.0 to 9.2. (The upper limit of the
value depends on the “Audio” setting.)
Rate
D /M1**
D /M2**
Standard setting.
Superior to
D/M1.Recommended for recording music programmes.
Audio
Disc
L-PCM
Uncompressed original digital audio. Equal quality to audio CD, but
recordable time will be shorter.
A programmed recording onto a Reservation Disc is marked with an
icon.
*
“Start” and “End” accept time up to 30:59 if you use the number buttons. When you enter a time over 24:00 and press the
ENTER button, “Date” will gain one day, and the time will be corrected to 0:00-6:59.
** The digital recording technology for consumer products of Dolby Laboratories is used for
Digital 192 kbps is set for D/M1 and Dolby Digital 384 kbps for D/M2.
D/M1 and
D/M2. Dolby
Notes
• See
page 51, 161 for details on “Mode”, “Rate”, and “Audio”.
• If you record with setting the bit rate to about 4.0 Mbps or below, the recorded pictures may not be played properly if change
the playback speed. There will be noise, and the picture quality is lower than other rate settings.
Suggestions for the picture quality setting
• For normal recording or when you cannot decide which mode to choose.
Select “SP”.
• When you need a longer recording time and video quality is not important
Select “LP”. Inferior to “SP” in picture quality, but it can record longer.
• To record a high picture quality
Select “MN (Manual)” to set a desired bit rate. The higher the bit rate, better the picture quality is, but shorter the
recording length becomes. We recommend that you set about 6.0 Mbps to 6.8 Mbps.
• To fill the disc
Select “Auto”. A bit rate is calculated automatically according to the remaining volume of the disc. Some contents may not be
recorded on the disc even if you select this function. This is not the function to make full use of the remaining space capacity.
(Continued)
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
Programming a recording (REC MENU) (Continued)
Notes
• The disc tray does not close automatically, even when the recording start time arrives. Set the recorder loaded an available
DVD-RAM/R/RW disc beforehand.
• It is not possible to record the same contents onto both the HDD and a DVD-RAM/RW/R disc simultaneously.
• When there is little time before a programmed recording starts, you may not be able to start another recording.
• Playback of the DVD drive pauses when a programmed recording onto the HDD starts.
• Confirm the “DVD compatible mode” (
page 162) setting. “Main” or “SAP” records main sound or sub-sound of multiplex
broadcasts respectively, and does not record the other. Therefore, select “Main” or “SAP” only when you record onto a DVD-
R/RW disc.
• When recording onto a DVD-R/RW disc, set “DVD compatible mode” (
page 162) to the desired recording sound for each
timer program.
which may have been delayed or even cancelled
and the recorder will record the programme even if
it is two or more hours late. With PDC, you enter the
exact start time and the recorder will wait until the
signal is sent to confirm the programme is starting
and the recorder will record the programme even if
it is two or more hours late.
Setting the details for every timer program
You can specify detail items for each of your timer
programme.
1) Press QUICK MENU at step 3 on
page 40.
The Quick Menu is displayed.
e.g.
REC
4/3 (Sa)19:00
1/
1
M
Quick Menu
Media Mode Rate Audio Disc
AV record quality
D/M1
4.6
DVD SP
PDC off
Edit title name
PDC on
Perform the normal programmed recording.
DVD compatible mode
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
High rate save
DVD compatible mode
Chap. mute
When recording onto a DVD-R/RW disc or
recording a content which will be copied to a
Genre setting
Exit
DVD-R/RW, make this selection (
each timer program.
“Off” setting is neglected and regarded as “Main” in
page 162) for
2) Press
/
to select an item and press ENTER.
DVD-R/RW recording.
AV record quality
Select an item from registered selections (1-5) for
the picture and audio quality.
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
Select the aspect ratio when recording onto a
Edit title name
Enter a name for the timer program.
DVD-R/RW disc. (
page 162)
Use the input screen to enter a name (
30).
page
High rate save
Use this feature when you want to save space while
using the best picture quality rate for recording. This
will use 9.2 Mbps for recording and reduce the rate
temporarily for the portion where the high rate is not
required where picture is fairly constant.
Off: This feature is disabled and the normal
recording is performed.
PDC on
Perform the programme PDC recording.
PDC (Programme Delivery Control System)
Programme PDC is a system of telling the recorder
when a programme actually starts. Typically, when
you want to record a programme you will tell the
recorder to start recording, probably, five minutes
before the advertized starting time of the
On: This feature is enabled.
Notes
• When the audio quality is set to “L-PCM”, the picture
quality is set to “Manual 8.0 Mbps”. When the audio
quality is set to any other selection, the picture
quality is set to “Manual 9.2 Mbps”.
• While this is set to “On,” you cannot change the mode
or rate.
programme and to finish ten minutes or so after the
programme is due to finish. So even if the
programme starts early or finishes late you will
normally still get to see what you wanted to record.
However when live programmes over-run or the
day’s television schedule is changed from that
advertized, you may miss the desired programme
• The space used may not change, depending on the
picture contents.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1) Press REC MENU.
Chap. mute
The REC MENU appears.
This feature automatically creates divisions for
chapters when no audio (no audible sound) portion
is found.
2) Press
/
to select a timer program you want
to shift the time period.
For example, when you have recorded a
programme of music clips, you can use this feature
to jump to the beginning of a clip during playback. It
does not create completely independent chapters
or automatically divide into chapters when no audio
portion is found.
Off : This feature is disabled.
On: Division for chapters when no audio portion is
found.
3) Open the lid of the remote control and press
EXTEND.
“Start time” and “End time” are ready to be input.
4) Press EXTEND repeatedly.
Each time you press the button, “Start time” and
“End time” is shifted in 10 minutes intervals to, up
to 60 minutes later.
5) Press ENTER.
Notes
6) Press REC MENU to exit.
• Divisions for chapters may not be created,
depending on the contents of the programme or the
condition of no audio portion, or it may be created at
different positions. A division for a chapter may be
created within a music clip.
• Depending on the specification made for the
recording sound level, a division for a chapter may
not be created or it may be created at different
positions.
• Setting “On” may create many chapters, and their
number may reach the maximum allowed. At that
point, no more chapters can be created. In this case,
decrease the chapters, for example by combining
Note
• After you shifted the time of a timer program which will be
repeated daily or weekly, you should restore the original
start/stop time for future recordings.
Adding a timer program
1) Press REC MENU.
The REC MENU appears.
chapters (
page 94).
2) Press to select a blank line, then press
ENTER.
• This feature is not available on DVD-R/RW discs. To
create chapters automatically during recording on
DVD-R/RW discs, set “DVD-Video:CHP create.” (
page 162).
3) Press
/
to select the item, then press
ADJUST to set the item.
4) When complete, press ENTER.
5) Press REC MENU to exit.
Genre setting
You can set a genre before setting programmed
recording.
To see the registered list, refer to Genre setting
Note
• While the recorder is preparing for or executing a
programmed recording, you cannot add a timer program
which will start within 5 minutes and 15 seconds from the
current time.
(
page 163).
Set the genre according to recording contents.
The selection you have made for the timer program
is shown at the bottom of the display.
Deleting a timer program
1) Press REC MENU.
Shifting a time period of a recording (Time
Shift)
If a prior TV programme extends beyond its scheduled
time and into one that you programmed, you can shift
the programmed start and end time of the recording.
The REC MENU appears.
2) Press
/
to select a timer program you want
to delete.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
13:00
13:54
4) Press
/
to select “Program cancel”, then
press ENTER.
Check the message, then delete the entry.
Time Shift
13:20
20 minutes
extend
5) Press REC MENU to exit.
14:14
Note
• You cannot delete a timer program while another is
executed.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
Programming a recording (REC MENU) (Continued)
Deleting the past data for programming
1) On the REC MENU, press QUICK MENU.
Correcting a timer program
1) Press REC MENU.
The REC MENU appears.
2) Press
/
to select “Elapsed programing”,
then press ENTER.
The “Elapsed programing” list appears.
2) Press
/
to select a timer program you want
to change, then press ENTER.
3) Press
/
to select a program to delete.
to select
3) Press
/
to select an item, then press
ADJUST to set the item.
4) Press QUICK MENU, then
/
“Elapsed programing delete”, and press
4) Press ENTER.
ENTER.
The modification is registered.
The selected data is deleted.
If you want to delete all data at once, select “All
elapsed programing delete”.
5) Press REC MENU to exit.
Important
• You cannot correct a timer program within 5 minutes before
the recording start time.You can only delete the timer
program.
Remaining volume
1) Press REC MENU.
Note
• You can program a timer recording whose start time has
already passed, unless the another program recording will
start within 5 minutes. The portion of the program before
the recording starts cannot be saved.
The REC MENU appears.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
3) Press
/
to select “Disc budget calculation”
Elapsed programing (using past data for
programing)
then press ENTER.
The Disc budget calculation menu appears.
1) Press REC MENU.
4) Press
/
to select a timer program, then
The REC MENU appears.
press ENTER or press ADJUST.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
The recorder calculates on a bar graph how much
a specific program (identified by a check mark)
will occupy on the disc.
The Quick Menu appears.
3) Press
/
to select “Elapsed programing”,
pm
Pressing the ADJUST button can display or
then press ENTER.
The “Elapsed programing” list appears.
remove the check mark.
e.g.
RECDisc budget calculation
4/3 (Sa)19:00
MENU
4) Press
ENTER.
5) Press
/
to select a program, then press
CH
Date
Start
End
Media Mode Rate Audio Result
(
)
D/M2
3
4/10 Sa 11:30 –11:50
MN
MN
LP
6.6
HDD
DVD
HDD
DVD
/
to select an item to correct, then
:
:
D/M2
D/M1
D/M2
(Tu)
:
:
10 4/13
9
30 10 00
–
6.6
2.2
4.6
–
(
)
)
42 4/16 Fr 10 30 11 30
press ADJUST to change the value.
6) When complete, press ENTER.
7) Press REC MENU to exit.
(
:
:
4
4/16 Fr
8
30 11 30
SP
–
(
)
Elapsed
Selected(current) Available
HDD
DVD
Note
• Up to 36 past programs are saved. Addition of a new one
deletes the oldest one.
Selected program
Available disc space
When the entry item is marked X, the
recording does not fit. Change the setting.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5) Correct the parameters of the timer program if
necessary.
Keeping the power on even after the
programmed recording finished
(Skip to step 7 if you do not need this.)
You can change “Media”, “Mode”, “Rate” and
“Audio”.
If the recorder turns itself on to execute a programmed
recording, it will turn itself off after finishing the
recording.You can restrict this and keep the recorder
powered on.
Select an item you want to modify and press the
ENTER button. The item will be ready to be altered.
Press the ADJUST button to modify. When
complete, press the ENTER button.
1) While executing a programmed recording,
press QUICK MENU.
2) Press
/
to select “Continuous power on”
then press ENTER.
You can adjust to a lower mode (SP to LP) and/or
lower the rate to reduce the quality of the recording,
and thus provide more disc capacity (space).
Delaying the end time of a programmed
recording while it is recording
6) Press
.
While a programmed recording has started, open
the lid of the remote control and press EXTEND.
Program modification is registered.
The first press displays the programmed end time (in
the front panel display).
7) Press REC MENU to exit the GUI.
Each time you press the button, it is delayed 10
minutes, up to 60 minutes.
Notes
• When a Reservation disc (
page 49) is inserted in the
recorder, you cannot check the remaining volume of other
discs.
Notes
• Pressing a button except EXTEND in the above procedure
will set the currently selected delay.
• The nearest 8 programs are calculated at a time.
• While the recorder is preparing for or executing a
programmed recording, any program modification cannot
be registered. Only programs which will start after 5
minutes or later can be modified.
• You cannot delay the end time of a programmed recording
which will end within 1 minute from the current time.
• Even if you delay the end time of a programmed recording,
the recording will stop when the disc is exhausted. Also it
will stop if 8 hours elapsed.
• Available disc volume is not displayed for a DVD-R/RW
disc on which DVD-Video finalize process was executed.
To stop a programmed recording
To finish,
Press on the front panel twice.
When you press it once, a message appears. While
the message is displayed, press the button once
again.
To pause recording,
Press on the front panel.
To resume recording, press it again.
Turning the power off automatically after
completing a programmed recording
1) While executing a programmed recording, press
QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
2) Press
/
to select “Auto power off” then
press ENTER.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
VIDEO Plus+ Recording
You can program a recording simply by entering the corresponding PlusCode® numbers.
Preparation
• Make sure that the recorder’s clock, receiving channels and their guide channels are set correctly (
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
page 28,
• When you record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc, load it into the recorder.
– Load a disc which has space available to record the programme.
– Make sure the loaded disc is not write-protected.
For satellite receiver users:
• Finish the set top boxsetting (
page 45, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”), and turn on the satellite receiver.
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
Open the lid of the remote control, and press
VIDEO Plus+.
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
1
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
The “REC MENU Timer Programing” with the PlusCode
input window appears.
VIDEO Plus+
e.g.
RECTimer Programing
4/3 (Sa)19:00
Media Mode Rate Audio Disc
1/
1
MENU
CH
Date
Start
End
Exec
(
)
D/M2
3
4/10 Sa 11 30 11:50
MN
MN
HDD SP
6.6
6.6
4.6
-
HDD
DVD
ENTER
:
:
(Tu)
:
:
D/M2
D/M1
10 4/13
---
9
30 10 00
-
------ -- -- -- --
VIDEO PLUS+
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
PLUS CODE:
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY
Press the appropriate number buttons to enter
the PlusCode.
R
R
E
EC
C
QUICK MENU
2
• Refer to newspapers or TV magazines to obtain
PlusCodes.
• To correct entered digits, press the CLEAR button to
erase them and press the number buttons to re-enter
again.
1
4
2
5
3
6
7
8
0
9
VIDEO Plus+ EXTEND REC MODE TV CODE
T.SEARCH
Note
1
2
3
• When you enter the number starting from 0, a 9-digit
CLEAR
number is entered.
4
5
6
DELETE
7
8
0
9
Press ENTER.
SETUP
ENTER
+
10
3
The entered program is highlighted.
ENTER
Open the lid.
CLEAR
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Select an item by pressing / , then press
ADJUST ( ) to set the item, if necessary.
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
/
4
DVD
MENU
RETURN
For details about items, see
page 40.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
To record a program from the connected satellite
recorder, keep the satellite receiver powered on.
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
R
Press ENTER.
ENTER
5
ENTER
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY
R
R
E
EC
C
QUICK MENU
To enter another program, repeat steps 1 to 5.
6
7
VIDEO Plus+ EXTEND REC MODE TV CODE
T.SEARCH
After completing all your entries, press REC
MENU.
1
2
3
CLEAR
4
5
6
The REC MENU disappears.
DELETE
7
8
0
9
REC MENU
To confirm your data, it is recommended to turn on the
REC MENU again.
SETUP
ENTER
+
10
Notes
• The maximum timer program capacity is 32. Any new program will be rejected if the recorder is full. To enter a new program,
you must cancel an existing one ( page 43).
• Depending on the program, an actual recording may continue a few minutes longer than programmed.
• Entries made under the following conditions will be rejected.
– when an entry is for a non existing program.
– when the digit order of an entry is in error.
– when the guide channel has not yet been set.
• To erase a timer program, press the QUICK MENU button to display a Quick Menu on the REC MENU. For details, see
“Deleting a timer program” (
page 43).
• When recording onto a DVD-R/RW disc, set “DVD compatible mode” (
page 42) to the desired recording sound for each
timer program.
• In the event of a broadcast delay, the next program starts even if when the start time arrives prior to the end of the previous
program.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
Others
To use the A–B recording function
HDD
DVD-RAM
Relay recording
At step 3 (
page 40), set “Media” to “A–B”. “Mode”
This function automatically diverts a recording to the
HDD if a DVD-RAM disc is near capacity.
is automatically set to “Auto”.
When the timer setting is completed, “ ” illuminates
When the remaining time of the DVD-RAM disc has
reached about 10 minutes, the recorder starts
on the front panel display.
recording the same content on the HDD as well as
DVD-RAM. The chapter marks are automatically made
at the start and end points of the overlapped recording
portion. You can delete the unnecessary overlapped
portion afterwards by referring to the chapter marks.
When recording starts
The same content is recorded on the HDD and the
DVD-RAM disc 10 minutes before the unit exchanges
the recording media.
Chapter marks are automatically made at the start and
end points of the overlapped recording portion, so you
can delete the unnecessary overlapped portion
afterwards.
If no DVD-RAM disc is loaded, or the loaded disc
contains recorded content, all of the recording is made
entirely on the HDD. The recording will contain one
title with a chapter mark at a dividing point.
Recording end
DVD-RAM disc
10min.
HDD
Recording start
To engage the Relay Recording function, set “Relay
recording” to “On” (
page 162).
During A–B recording, the picture quality mode is set
to “Auto” and the unit automatically calculates the
picture rate from the disc capacity. Even if the picture
rate is set to “Auto”, the picture quality of the A–B
recording is lower than that of the recording on the
HDD, because the unit adds 10 minutes of the
overlapped portion to the recording time for capacity
calculation. Therefore, the picture rate will remain
when the unit cannot record onto a DVD-RAM disc
and records on the HDD instead.
Notes
• When the capacity of the HDD is not sufficient, the
operation is cancelled.
• While recording the overlapped portion, you cannot pause
the recording.
• While recording the overlapped portion, you cannot play a
recorded title on the same disc.
• When another programmed recording is set just after the
relay recording, the relay recording stops about 2 minutes
before the next programmed recording starts.
After recording
Copy the second half of the programme recorded on
the HDD to the alternate side of the double sided
DVD-RAM disc, or another single sided DVD-RAM
HDD
DVD-RAM
A–B recording
This function records one programme at the highest
possible rate onto a double sided DVD-RAM disc
(9.4GB) or 2 single sided DVD-RAM discs (4.7GB).
You can record a long programme with a clearer
picture on a DVD-RAM disc.
disc. See
you want to delete the overlapped portion, perform the
procedure detailed on page 50 to delete the
page 106 for dubbing operations. When
overlapped portion either on the HDD or the DVD-
RAM disc.
The A–B recording function records the first half of the
programme on the DVD-RAM disc and second half of
the programme on the HDD. After the recording, copy
the second half recorded on the HDD to the DVD-
RAM disc. You can create a DVD-RAM library that has
each half of a programme recorded at the highest
possible quality.
If the entire programme has been recorded on the
HDD, copy both parts of programme onto both sides
of a blank double sided DVD-RAM disc or two single
sided DVD-RAM discs by referring to the chapter mark
at the dividing point.
Notes
• For A–B recording, use a 12 cm DVD-RAM disc (4.7GB
single sided or 9.4GB double sided) that is formatted on
this unit just before recording. Do not use an 8-cm disc.
Check that the total available space of the HDD is sufficient
for the recording one DVD-RAM disc.
• DVD-RW/R discs are not available on the A-B recording.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To delete the information of a Reservation Disc
If you lose a Reservation Disc, delete the information
of the Reservation Disc.
Press the QUICK MENU button to select the program
of which data you want to delete, and press the
QUICK MENU button. Select “Program record unlock”
and then “Unlock selected program.”
If no programmed recording is set on the loaded disc,
press the QUICK MENU button to select “Program
record unlock” and then “Unlock prog. rec. disc”.
Reservation Disc (“Lock program record”)
DVD-RAM
This function is convenient when you wish to record
multiple serial related programs on the same disc.
The disc on which you write the reservation data is
called “Reservation Disc.” A Reservation Disc may
contain only one reservation.
Once a Reservation Disc is created, you cannot use
other discs to record the same serial program. The
Reservation Disc can be used only for recording a
program reserved for the Reservation Disc.
If you schedule a date for programmed recording on
the Reservation Disc, the recording information is
automatically deleted after the programmed recording
is completed.
As an example, if you create a Reservation Disc for a
serial broadcast from 9 pm to 10 pm on Monday, then
you can use that disc only for that program. When you
attempt to make a reservation or record that serial, the
recorder will ask you to insert that Reservation Disc.
To stop the Reservation Disc recording
Press the STOP button on the front panel once. The
message appears.
While it is displayed, press the STOP button again.
Recording stops.
If the start time of a programmed recording of a
Reservation Disc comes while recording
1) Load a DVD-RAM disc.
A recording start time has priority. The current
recording stops about 15 seconds before the start
time, and a recording of a Reservation Disc starts on
time.
2) Press REC MENU.
The REC MENU appears.
3) Press
record.
/
to select the program you want to
e.g. When a start time of a programmed recording of a
Reservation Disc comes during recording on the HDD:
Make sure that “Media” shows “DVD”.
4) Press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
11:00
(End)
Not recorded.
10:00
(Start)
HDD
5) Press
/
to select “Lock program record” then
“Yes” and press ENTER.
Reservation Disc
10:44:45
After the recording data is entered, a Reservation
disc icon appears on the REC MENU.
If the Reservation Disc is not loaded, the entry data
and icon are displayed in gray.
10:45:00
(Start)
11:55
(End)
To cancel the Reservation Disc setting
Load the disc you want to cancel and select the
recording option on the REC MENU. Press the QUICK
MENU button to select “Unlock program record” then
“Yes”, and press the ENTER button.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To delete recorded content
To protect recorded content
HDD
DVD-RAM
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Important note
Any deleted title/chapter (original) cannot be restored.
Before deleting, be sure to check contents on the disc.
You can protect recorded content from unexpected
deletion.
Protection is provided for each title (original).
1) Perform steps 1 and 2 in “Playing recorded
ENTER
contents (CONTENT MENU)” (
page 55) to
select a title.
/
/
/
2) Press the QUICK MENU button, and press the
buttons to select “Title information”. Then
/
press the ENTER button.
3) Press the QUICK MENU button, and press the
/
buttons to select “Lock” and then press
the ENTER button.
The mark appears.
Notes
DELETE
• To cancel protection, repeat this procedure.
• Disc initialization erases all titles on a disc even if they are
protected.
• Executing “All HDD titles delete” (
page 163) erases all
titles on the HDD even if they are protected.
1) Perform steps 1 and 2 in “Playing recorded
contents (CONTENT MENU)” (
page 55) to
select a title (chapter).
2) Open the lid of the remote control and press the
DELETE button.
Alternate method:
Press the QUICK MENU button, then press the
/
buttons to select “Title delete” (“Chapter
delete”) and press the ENTER button.
3) Read the message and press the
to select “Yes,” then press the ENTER button.
/
buttons
Notes
• Deleting a title (a chapter) decreases the numbers of the
succeeding titles (chapters).
• A chapter of about 5 seconds or shorter may not be
deleted. Deleting a short chapter may not change the
display of the available disc volume.
• Deleting a playlist (
page 87) title/chapter does not
affect the original title/chapter.
• Deleting an original (
page 87) title/chapter affects all
the corresponding playlist title/chapters.
• Deleting all chapters in a title erases the title itself.
• Title and chapter which contains still pictures cannot be
deleted.
• On a DVD-R/RW disc, deleting is not possible if the disc is
finalized (
page 132).
• Chapters in a DVD-R/RW disc cannot be deleted.
•
•
On a DVD-RW disc, only a title last recorded can restore
the disc capacity by being deleted.
On a DVD-R disc, deleting cannot restore the disc capacity
.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical information
About recording time
On a blank 4.7 GB DVD-RAM disc, the “Auto” mode
automatically sets the appropriate bit rate
The recording time of a typical VCR (Video Cassette
Recorder) is determined by the length of a video tape
and recording speed (SP, LP, etc.). Video tapes with
various recording times are available in the market.
On the other hand, the recording time of a DVD-RAM/
R/RW depends on the bit rate (Mbps: amount of data
transmitted per second), which can be varied in
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group2)
corresponded to the recording time from about 1 hour
to up to 2 and a half hours so that you can achieve the
best picture quality. If a part of a DVD-RAM disc has
already been recorded, the “Auto” mode sets the bit
rate suitable for the remaining space on the disc. (The
picture quality is determined referring the remaining
space just before recording. When the remaining
space is scarce in the disc, the picture quality may
decrease from what you set beforehand or the
recording may stop halfway.) “Auto” mode is available
also on DVD-R/RW recordings.
When you want to record a music program or
animation with high picture quality, it is recommended
that you select the “MN” mode. If you select more than
6 Mbps, you can usually record with considerably
higher picture quality. However the higher you set the
bit rate, the shorter the recording time.
compression technology.
As an example, when you pour water into a bucket
from a faucet, the faster the water flows, the sooner
the bucket is filled with water. On the other hand, the
slower the water flows, the more slowly the bucket is
filled. The DVD-RAM/R/RW is, so to speak, such a
bucket, and the degree you turn the faucet is bit rate,
the time required to fill the bucket with water is the
recording time available for a disc. The higher you set
the bit rate (making much more water flow), the
sooner a disc is filled. Consequently, the recording
time becomes shorter. The lower you set the bit rate,
the longer time it takes to fill a disc.
D /M1,
D /M2
Sound recording format onto DVD-RAM discs. When
recording, sounds are converted into digital signals
and compressed. In playback, they are extracted to
About picture quality (SP, LP, Auto, MN(Manual)
mode)
The higher you set the bite rate, the more the volume
of information for the picture. The lower the bit rate,
the less the volume of picture information.
However a high bit rate does not always mean that the
picture quality is high. The difference between the 1.4
Mbps and 9.2 Mbps is obvious, but when comparing
similar bit rates, the difference may be insignificant.
Generally when you set the bit rate low for longer
recording time, the data volume shortage will result in
a lack of detail information. As a result, the picture
quality is decreased (more noticeable with dynamically
moving images). For example, square noises (block
noise) may occur in a scene with fast action or a
scene with light and shadows, such as a water
surface.
the original sound. The standard differenciates
D /
D /M1
D /M2 are applied the digital recording
M1 and
and
D /M2 in data volume to use.
technology for consumer products of Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby Digital 192 kbps is set for
D /
M1 and Dolby Digital 384 kbps for
D /M2.
L-PCM (Linear PCM)
Sound recording format, like Dolby Digital. However,
sounds are converted into digital signals and recorded
as they are without compression. This process
requires more data than Dolby Digital.
This recorder has a two settings, 2 hour recording at
“SP” mode or 4 hour recording at “LP” mode (both
assume a blank 4.7 GB DVD-RAM). It is
recommended to consider the “SP” mode as a
standard mode and use the “LP” mode when you want
to record for long time regardless of the picture quality.
If you want to record for about 2 hours or are uncertain
which one to select, select the “Auto” mode.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Play your favorite contents.
Information on playback
Playing recorded contents
(CONTENT MENU)
Playing a DVD video disc
Pausing a TV broadcast to
resume later
Playing a TV programme
currently being recorded
Playing at various speeds
Locating by entering the number
Watching a TV broadcast in the
sub window (P in P Playback)
Selecting the camera angle
Selecting Subtitles
Zooming a picture
Selecting the sound
Viewing JPEG files
Playing MP3/WMA Files
Checking the current status and
settings
Functions in the Quick Menu
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Information on playback
The operation procedure depends on the kind of disc. See the respective pages for basic procedure to
play the disc.
To play contents recorded onto the HDD or DVD-RAM discs
Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) (
page 55)
To play a DVD video disc
Playing a DVD video disc (
page 60)
To play a DVD-R/RW disc
DVD-R/RW discs recorded on this recorder
Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) (
DVD-R/RW discs recorded on other devices
Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) (
page 55)
page 55)
Playing a DVD video disc (
page 60)
DVD-R/RW discs recorded in DVD-VR mode
Playing a DVD-RW disc recorded in DVD-VR mode (
page 59)
To switch the drive to play
Press the STOP button to stop playback. Then press the HDD or DVD button to select the drive.
To switch the picture to view TV broadcasts
Press the STOP button to stop playback.
To start recording
Press the STOP button to stop playback.
Then press the HDD or DVD button to select a recording media, and press the REC button to start recording.
Screen Protection
If you pause playback or display a menu and leave it still for about 15 minutes, the recorder switches the output
picture source to a TV broadcast or connected equipment.
A still picture may be displayed after all titles are played. In this case, the screen protection activates after about 10
seconds.
Notes
• Do not move the recorder during playback. It may damage the disc.
• Occasionally the picture may stop at the last scene, or the main menu may appear after playing.
If you display a still picture such as the main menu on the TV screen for a prolonged period, the TV may be damaged (image
burn). To prevent this, press the STOP button to stop playback.
• A still picture for about 15 minutes while the TIMESLIP indicator illuminates, will return to normal playback. If the playback is
completed, a still picture of the title end will continue unless you press the TIMESLIP button.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU)
Titles and chapters recorded on the HDD or a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc are displayed in thumbnail view, so
that you can easily locate a desired one.
OPEN/CLOSE
During stop or playback, press CONTENT
MENU.
DVD
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
1
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
The “CONTENT MENU Title List” appears.
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
e.g.
CONTENT MENU
CONTENT
MENU
HDD
Title List
1
/
2
Page
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
001:
:
:
2004/06/08
7
00
(0:53:45)
Original
2004/06/08 23 00
REC MENU EDIT MENU
:
:
Ch
4
Ch
6
(0:29:50)
Original
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
:
:
2004/06/12 19 00
2004/07/11
7
00
(0:54:30)
Original
:
:
Ch
3
Ch
8
(0:52:40)
Original
:
:
2004/07/12 23 00
2004/07/12 21 00
:
:
Ch
4
Ch 10
Attribution
(original/playlist)
(0:30:08)
(0:51:28)
Original
ENTER
Original
page 87
You can switch between HDD and DVD drives by
pressing the HDD or DVD button.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
Press
/
/
/
to select a title (chapter).
QUICK MENU
2
3
You can view succeeding or prior pages by pressing the
PICTURE SEARCH ( ) button.
To select a chapter, select a title and press the
button.
The Chapter List appears.
By pressing the
Title List.
/
ENTER
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
button again, you can return to the
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
Press ENTER.
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Playback starts from a selected title (chapter).
ENTER
QUICK MENU
PICTURE SEARCH
SKIP
Notes
• In a CONTENT MENU, titles (Original) precede titles (Playlist), in order from the oldest one respectively.
• To turn off the CONTENT MENU, press the CONTENT MENU button. Absence of operations for longer than about 15
minutes also turns off the CONTENT MENU.
• The mark is displayed in every thumbnail when “HDD/RAM title play” (
page 160) is set to “Title resume”. When set to
“Serial playback”, it is displayed in a thumbnail last operated.
• You can change a thumbnail picture. See
• You cannot display the CONTENT MENU for DVD-R/RW discs recorded on other devices.
• For playing a recorded title while recording another, see page 36.
page 100.
• A black thumbnail with “Recording” means that the title is being recorded or its recording will start within 15 seconds. This
thumbnail cannot start playback.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) (Continued)
Notes
To stop playback
• Depending on the status or the contents, playback may not
start from the location last stopped, but instead another
location. For example, from the beginning of the disc or
title.
Press STOP.
STOP
• Depending on the disc, there may be a slight difference
between the location the recorder memorized and the
actual location where playback starts.
To pause playback (still playback)
• This function is not available on DVD-R/RW discs.
• The resuming function will not work if the write-protect tab
Press PAUSE.
is set to “PROTECT” (
page 8).
PAUSE
Playing the digest (Skip search)
This feature repeats playback of about 5 seconds and
skip of 1 minute from the beginning to the end of a
recorded title, so that you can view the digest of it.
To resume normal playback, press the PLAY button or
the PAUSE button.
Note
1) Perform steps 1 and 2 on
page 55, and
• Sound is muted during still mode.
select a title that you want to view the digest.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu is displayed.
Resuming playback from the location last
stopped (Title resume)
The recorder memorizes the location you last stopped
playback to resume there.
3) Press
/
to select “Special playback mode”,
then press ENTER.
4) Press to select “Skip search”, then press
ENTER.
The Skip Search starts.
/
To use this function, set “HDD/RAM title play” (
page 160) to “Title resume.” The recorder will
memorize the location you last stopped at in each title,
so you can resume playback there. For example, if
there are 6 titles, you can start each of them as if you
had stored 6 video tapes in the recorder.
Notes
• This feature can be used only one title (original) recorded
on the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.
• While using this feature, you cannot use speed-related
functions such as fast forward or fast reverse.
• If you press the ENTER button while using this feature, the
normal playback starts.
• To return to the beginning of the title
During playback, press the QUICK MENU button,
then press the
/
buttons to select “Restart title,”
• To cancel this feature, press the STOP button twice.
then press the ENTER button.
• To play another title
Press the CONTENT MENU button to display
“CONTENT MENU Title List,” then select a title.
You can make the recorder memorize only the very
last point, regardless of the number of titles. Set
“HDD/RAM title play” (
page 160) to “Serial
playback.”
• To return to the beginning of the title
Press the SKIP (
) button repeatedly until the
beginning of the title appears.
• To play the other title
Press the SKIP (
/
) button repeatedly.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing the first scenes of titles (Original)
(Intro scan)
Playing all titles (Original) in a disc
(Play All ORG Titles)
You can play all Original titles in the HDD or a DVD-
RAM disc in the order of the thumbnails on the
CONTENT MENU, as if they were recorded in one
video tape.
1) After step 1 on
page 55, press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
2) Press
/
to select “Special playback mode”,
then press ENTER.
1) During stop, press QUICK MENU.
3) Press
ENTER.
/
to select “Intro scan”, then press
The Quick Menu appears.
The recorder plays the first 5 seconds of each title
beginning from title 1.
2) Press
then press ENTER.
/
to select “Special playback mode”,
You can go forward or back by pressing the SKIP
buttons.
e.g.
: to go to the next title.
Quick Menu
Bit rate
Intro scan
Skip search
: to go back to the current title.
Press twice to go back to the previous title.
Special playback mode
Disc management
DVD compatible mode
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
DVD-Video:CHP create
AV record quality
Exit
Repeat all ORG titles
Play all ORG titles
4) When you find a desired title, press ENTER.
The selected title is played.
Notes
• To stop Intro Scan, press the STOP button twice.
• This feature can be used only titles (Original) recorded on
the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.
3) Press
press ENTER.
/
to select “Play all ORG titles”, then
Playing all titles (Original/Playlist) in a disc
e.g.
Set “HDD/RAM title play” (
page 160) to “Serial
playback”. You can play all titles in the HDD and DVD-
RAM disc in the order of the thumbnails on the
CONTENT MENU, as if they were recorded in one
video tape.
Quick Menu
Bit rate
Intro scan
Skip search
Special playback mode
Disc management
DVD compatible mode
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
DVD-Video:CHP create
AV record quality
Repeat all ORG titles
Play all ORG titles
Exit
Playback starts from the beginning of title 1.
Notes
• To stop “Play all ORG titles”, press the STOP button twice.
(However, doing this when you are playing a title recorded
in the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc while recording (
36) will stop the recording.)
page
Alternatively, press the QUICK MENU button to display the
quick menu, and press the buttons to select “Cancel
/
play all ORG titles” and press the ENTER button.
• When the last title is complete, All ORG Title Play stops.
• If you select “Repeat all ORG titles” at step 3), “Play all
ORG titles” repeats.
• This function is available only for titles recorded on the
HDD or DVD-RAM discs.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) (Continued)
Checking the background information on a
selected title
Changing the order of the titles
You can change the order or sort the titles by genre.
1) Press CONTENT MENU.
1) At step 2 on
page 55, select a title (chapter)
then press QUICK MENU.
The CONTENT MENU appears.
The Quick Menu appears.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
2) Press
/
to select “Title information”, then
The Quick Menu appears.
press ENTER.
Detailed information of a selected title (chapter)
appears.You can switch the chapters in the title by
3) Press
/
to select “Display changeover”,
then press ENTER.
pressing the PICTURE SEARCH (
buttons.
/
)
e.g.
CON
ME
Quick Menu
1
/
2
Page
HDD
Title information
Create thum
Arrange
:
b
n
a
i
l
7
Sort by genre
Original
2004/06/08 23 00
:
Ch
6
High speed dubbing
Rate conversion dubbing
3
(0:29:50)
Original
Playlist
Notes
l
Chapter function
Edit functon
• From the Quick Menu on the “CONTENT MENU Title
Information”, you can change the details such as name,
genre or time, which will help sorting and searching on
:
:
19 00
2004/07/11
7
00
(0:54:30)
Original
Special playback m
Save chaptures images
Disc information
Display changeover
23 00
Specific page jump
ode
:
Ch
8
2:40)
l
:
:
2004/07/12 21 00
Library system (
Also you can protect the title from unexpected erasure
page 50).
page 140).
:
Title delete
Exit
Ch 10
0:08)
al
(0:51:28)
Original
(
• To return to the previous display, press the button.
• To cancel the procedure, press the CONTENT MENU
button.
4) Press
ENTER.
• Arrange
/
to select the item, then press
The titles are rearranged along with the selected
order.
Press the
/
buttons to select the order, then
press the ENTER button.
• Sort by genre
Titles of the selected genre are sorted.
Press the
/
buttons to select the genre, then
press the ENTER button.
• Original
Titles (Original) are sorted.
• Playlist
Titles (Playlist) are sorted.
Note
• The recorder holds your selection until the power is turned
off. To cancel, select “Display changeover” then “Cancel
Arrange/Narrowing” from the Quick Menu.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Jumping to a specified page
1) Press CONTENT MENU.
The CONTENT MENU appears.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
3) Press
/
to select “Specific page jump”, then
press ENTER.
4) Enter the page number you want by pressing
ADJUST,
/
or the number buttons.
e.g.
CONTENT
MENU
Title List
:
1
/
2
Page
HDD
HDD
:
:
2004/06/08
7
00
(0:53:45)
Original
2004/06/08 23 00
:
:
Ch
4
Ch
6
(0:29:50)
Original
Specific Page Jump
:
200
2004/07/11
7
00
(0:54:30)
Original
:
C
Ch
8
Page Number
– – –
(0:52:40)
Original
:
:
2004/07/12 23 00
:
2004/07/12 21 00
:
Ch
4
Ch 10
(0:30:08)
(0:51:28)
Original
Original
To clear the number, press the CLEAR button.
5) Press ENTER.
The specified page appears.
Playing a DVD-RW disc recorded in DVD-VR
mode
See
page 55.
Notes
• Some disc’s conditions or discs which contain copy once
contents may not permit proper playback.
• “Title resume” (
page 160) is not available.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
Playing a DVD video disc
You can also play VIDEO CDs, audio CDs or finalization processed DVD-R/RW discs in the same manner.
To play recorded contents, follow the instructions on
page 55.
Preparation
• Turn on a TV or audio system and select the corresponding input source that the recorder is connected to.
• Load a disc you want to play. (
page 20)
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
Press DVD.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
1
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
The DVD indicator on the front panel illuminates.
This status indicates that the recorder is ready to play a
disc in the disc tray (DVD mode).
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
DVD
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press PLAY.
ENTER
2
Playback starts.
PLAY
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
• Depending on the disc, playback starts automatically
by loading the disc.
• The recorder may take a short time to start playback.
This occurs because the recorder is reading the data
of a disc.
QUICK MENU
STOP
PAUSE
To stop playback
To pause playback (still playback)
Press STOP.
Press PAUSE.
STOP
PAUSE
To resume normal playback, press the PLAY button or
the PAUSE button.
Note
• Sound is muted during still mode.
Note
• DVD video disc provides high resolution pictures and a lot of information. Because of this, you may notice some fine picture
noises on TV screen, which you have never seen with regular broadcast TV programme. While the amount of noise depends
on the TV you use with the recorder, you should generally reduce the sharpness adjustment on your TV when viewing DVD
video discs.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming playback from the location last
stopped (Resume Play)
Locating a title using the top menu
DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
Some DVD video discs may include a top menu, on
which you can view the structure of contents or select
a scene. Most of the top menus automatically appear
in certain scenes, and also are displayed on demand.
Actual operation of the top menu depends on the disc.
This section explains a general example of how to
operate a top menu. Also refer to the instructions of
the disc itself.
You can resume playback from the location where you
stopped.
If you press the PLAY button after stopping playback,
playback resumes from the location you have stopped.
If you stop playback by pressing the STOP button
twice, the resume playback feature will be cancelled.
Notes
TOP MENU
• Resume feature cannot function when:
–you select a disc menu language (
page 154) or change
the parental lock setting (
page 155).
–you play a PBC-featured VIDEO CD while “PBC” (
156) is set to “On”.
page
ENTER
–you open the disc tray.
–you cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process of a DVD-RW
disc.
/
/
/
• There may be a difference in the location where playback
resumes depending on the disc.
• While the recorder retains a location in memory, initial
setting changes with GUI may function only after the
memory is cleared.
1) Press TOP MENU.
2) Press to select the title you want.
/
/
/
If the titles in the top menu are assigned a number,
you can directly locate a specific title by pressing its
designated number with the number buttons.
3) Press ENTER.
Notes
• The instructions above describe basic procedures which
may vary depending on the contents of the DVD video
disc. If different instructions appear on the TV screen,
follow those instructions.
• If you display the top menu during playback and press the
TOP MENU button again without selecting any title, the
recorder may resume playback from the point where you
first pressed the TOP MENU button. (depending on the
actual DVD video disc.)
• This method of locating a title is available only on a disc
that contains a top menu.
• Instruction notes of discs may refer to the button that
displays the top menu as the TITLE button.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
HDD
Pausing a TV broadcast to resume later
This function enables you to pause a TV broadcast and resume viewing at a later, more convenient time,
by storing the TV broadcast temporarily on the HDD.
While viewing a TV broadcast via this recorder
OPEN/CLOSE
or immediately before it starts, press TIMESLIP
.
1
2
DVD
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
The current picture pauses.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
The recorder begins to store the broadcast on the HDD
the moment you press the TIMESLIP button.
TIMESLIP
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
Resume playback by pressing PAUSE or PLAY
.
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
• You can confirm how far you are from the current
broadcast by pressing the TIME BAR button.
• Playback may not resume immediately after you press
the PLAY or PAUSE button.
PAUSE
PLAY
ENTER
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
QUICK MENU
Locate a scene you want by the following
methods.
3
4
Fast-forward/fast-reverse:
Press the PICTURE SEARCH button.
Forward/reverse slow-motion:
Press the SLOW button.
Forward/reverse frame by frame play:
First press the PAUSE button then press the FRAME button.
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
• To resume normal playback, press the PLAY button.
• You can play in fast-forward to within 10 seconds prior to the
current broadcast.
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Press TIMESLIP to exit this mode.
FRAME
TIME BAR
The recorder stops storing the broadcast on the HDD.
A message appears and asks you whether you will save
SLOW
PICTURE SEARCH
TIMESLIP
the stored data or erase it.
Press the
button.
/
buttons to select, then press the ENTER
Notes
• This function is not available during recording.
• Pause TV recording stops when the HDD is filled up. It will not begin if the HDD is full.
• While using this pause TV recording, you cannot program a recording.
• Playback may jump a few seconds back or pause depending on the disc or data condition.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
HDD
DVD-RAM
Playing a TV programme currently being recorded
You can begin playback from the beginning of a programme currently being recorded.
You will find this function of great advantage on long programmes, as you do not have to wait for the
end of recording to begin playback.
OPEN/CLOSE
While recording a TV programme on the HDD
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
or a DVD-RAM disc, press TIMESLIP.
1
2
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
The recorder displays a TV program as it is being
recorded.
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
TIMESLIP
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Go back to the beginning of the TV program
using SKIP.
When you go back to the beginning, playback starts
ENTER
I
automatically.
You can confirm how far you are from the current
broadcast by pressing the TIME BAR button.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
Locate a scene you want through the
following operations if necessary.
QUICK MENU
3
4
Fast-forward/fast-reverse:
Press the PICTURE SEARCH button.
Forward/reverse slow-motion:
Press the SLOW buttons.
Forward/reverse frame by frame play:
First press the PAUSE button then press the FRAME button.
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
• To resume normal playback, press the PLAY button.
• You can play in fast-forward to within 10 seconds prior to the
current broadcast.
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Press TIMESLIP to exit.
The current broadcast returns.
TIME BAR
PLAY
PAUSE
FRAME
SLOW
TIMESLIP
PICTURE SEARCH
Notes
• Time slip recording/playback stops when the disc is filled up.You can play up to a location where the recorder stopped the
recording. The time slip recording/playback cannot begin if the disc is full.
• The playback picture may appear after a delay of several seconds.
• The playback location will never be identical to the record location in the programme. It will always trail the record location by
a few seconds.
• While using time slip recording/playback, you cannot program a recording.
• While the TIMESLIP indicator is on, you cannot change the setting of the feature that turns off the recorder after a
programmed operation has finished.
• Even while “Auto power off” is selected, the recorder does not turn off if the recording end time comes during playback of a
programme being recorded.
• This function is not available on a DVD-RAM disc while the A-B recording is executing or when “Relay recording” is set to
“On.”
• Playback may jump a few seconds back or pause depending on the disc or data condition.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
Playing at various speeds
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
Playing in fast reverse or fast forward
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
During normal playback, press PICTURE
SEARCH.
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
1
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
: Fast forward playback
: Fast reverse playback
E
Each time you press the button, the playback speed
changes.
ENTER
During fast forward playback at “ ” speed, sound is
reproduced. (Not available on VIDEO CD.)
• This function is not available when you play a title
recorded on a DVD-RAM disc while recording
another.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
QUICK MENU
PLAY
/
INSTANT REPLAY
INSTANT SKIP
Notes
• The playback speed may vary depending on the disc.
• Depending on the disc or data condition, picture and sound
Time bar display
Fast-forward or fast-reverse playback automatically
displays a time bar.
in fast forward playback at “ ” speed may be disturbed.
e.g.
:
:
:
:
:
:
00 00 00
Location 00 00 24:05F
00 00 40
To resume normal playback
Press PLAY.
For details, see
page 81.
To skip the contents in pre-determined
increments
To skip back in pre-determined increments
During playback, press INSTANT REPLAY.
Each time you press the button, you can go back by
the specified time to resume playback.
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
During playback, press INSTANT SKIP.
Each time you press the button, you can skip by the
specified time.
You can select the interval per press of the button.
You can select the interval per press of the button.
See “Instant replay interval” (
Notes
page 160).
See “Instant skip interval” (
page 160).
• Some discs may not permit this operation.
• Depending on disc structure, some operations may be
limited.
To skip by 1/20 of whole
• Depending on playback status, some operations may not
work.
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
During playback, press
/
.
Each time you press the button, you can skip by 1/20
of the current title or track if it is longer than 1 minute.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
Skipping to the next/previous chapter or track
REC MENU EDIT MENU
Press SKIP (
/
) repeatedly until the
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
chapter or track number you want appears.
1
Playback starts from the selected chapter or track.
I
: Playback starts from the beginning of the next
chapter or track.
ENTER
: Playback starts from the beginning of the current
chapter or track.
When you press twice, playback starts from the
beginning of the previous chapter or track.
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY
Notes
• Some titles may not display chapter numbers.
• When playing the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc, you can access chapters only in the current title if “HDD/RAM title play” (
page 160) is set to “Title resume”. To access chapters in other titles, set to “Serial playback”.
• When playing a DVD video disc or a DVD-R/RW disc, you can locate chapters only in the current title if “DVD title stop” (
page 156) is set to “On”. To access chapters in other titles, set to “Off”. However, in this instance even though you press the
SKIP button (
chapter.
) to go back to the previous title, playback starts not from the last chapter of the title but from the first
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Playing in slow-motion
Press SLOW during playback.
1
ENTER
: Forward slow-motion
: Reverse slow-motion
R
Each time you press the SLOW button, the slow-motion
speed changes.
E
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
QUICK MENU
PLAY
Notes
• Slow-motion does not provide smooth playback.
• When playing a VIDEO CD, reverse slow-motion playback
is not available.
To resume normal playback
Press PLAY.
• The speed level displayed is approximate.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Playing at various speeds (Continued)
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Playing frame by frame
During playback, press PAUSE.
1
ENTER
A still picture is displayed.
PAUSE
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
QUICK MENU
Press FRAME (
/
).
2
: Playback direction
: Opposite direction
R
PLAY
To resume normal playback
Press PLAY or PAUSE.
Notes
• Sound is muted during frame by frame playback.
• Frame by frame playback cannot provide smooth playback.
• Picture may advance more than 1 frame at a time.
• Depending on the scene, some frames may not be played.
• When playing a VIDEO CD, reverse frame by frame
playback is not available.
Viewing still pictures (Playing a disc that contains still pictures)
DVD-RAM DVD-VIDEO
EASY
NAVI
Press PLAY.
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
1
The first still picture on a disc is displayed.
PLAY
Some DVD video discs may allow you to change the
pictures using the PLAY, ENTER or SKIP button.
ENTER
Press FRAME (
/
).
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
2
: Displays the next still picture.
: Displays the previous still picture.
QUICK MENU
R
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
Locating by entering the number
Locating by entering the number of a desired section
Normally titles, chapters, and tracks are numbered. By entering these numbers, you can access a desired section.
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
Press T.SEARCH.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
1
2
3
If you are using a VIDEO CD/audio CD, skip step 2.
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
e.g.
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
T.SEARCH
EASY
NAVI
Title
001
Search Chapter 0001
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press
/
to select a section (title or chapter)
you want to locate.
ENTER
e.g. When you want to locate a chapter.
Title
001
ENTER
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY
Search Chapter 0001
R
R
E
EC
C
QUICK MENU
Press the number buttons to enter a number
of the section.
VIDEO Plus+ EXTEND REC MODE TV CODE
T.SEARCH
e.g. To enter 25, press “2”, then press “5”.
1
4
2
5
3
6
1
2
3
CLEAR
7
8
0
9
4
5
6
DELETE
7
8
0
9
SETUP
ENTER
+
10
Press ENTER.
4
Playback starts from the selected location.
ENTER
Open the lid.
CLEAR
Notes
• Pressing the CLEAR button resets the numbers. To clear the display, press the T.SEARCH button several times (depending
on the disc).
• This method of locating a title is available only on a disc that contains title numbers.
• If a title is erased, the numbers of the following titles decrease respectively.
• When you record a new title (Original) on the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc, it is added prior to current titles (Playlist), and each
following title (Playlist) reference number will advance by a factor of 1.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Locating by entering the number (Continued)
Locating a specific point by entering its elapsed time (Time Search)
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
Press T.SEARCH.
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
1
2
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
You may have to press repeatedly, depending on the
disc. Press the button until the following display
appears.
REC MENU EDIT MENU
T.SEARCH
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
e.g.
Title
Search Time
001
:
:
00 00 00
ENTER
Press the number buttons and
/
to enter
the desired time location on the disc.
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY
e.g. To enter 1 hour, 25 minutes, and 30 seconds
1
4
2
3
6
RR
E
EC
C
QUICK MENU
5
8
0
“0” → “1” → “ ” → “2” → “5” → “ ” → “3” → “0”
hour minute second
7
9
ENTER
VIDEO Plus+ EXTEND REC MODE TV CODE
T.SEARCH
1
2
3
CLEAR
4
5
6
DELETE
7
8
0
9
Press ENTER.
SETUP
ENTER
+
10
3
Playback starts from the selected location.
ENTER
Open the lid.
CLEAR
Notes
• Some discs may not respond to this process.
• Some scenes may not be accessed precisely as you specified.
• This method for accessing specific locations is available only within the current title of the HDD or a DVD-RAM/R/RW/DVD
video disc or within a current track of a VIDEO CD/audio CD.
• Pressing the CLEAR button resets the numbers.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Watching a TV broadcast in the sub window (P in P Playback)
During playback, you can watch a TV broadcast in the sub window. (P in P : Picture in Picture)
During playback, press P in P.
OPEN/CLOSE
1
DVD
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
A sub window (programme on the air or on the
recording) appears.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
P in P
e.g.
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
ENTER
Press
sub window.
/
/
/
to select the position of the
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
2
QUICK MENU
You can shift the sub window in following 4 directions.
ENTER
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
↑ / ↓ / ← / → is the moving range.
To turn off the sub window, press the P in P button.
CHANNEL
Notes
• You can change the channel of the sub window by pressing the CHANNEL
/
button.
• The P in P function is available only during playback.
• You cannot swap the playback picture with the picture within the sub window, or change the audio settings.
• Press the P in P button during “Chase Play” or “Pause TV”, the actual broadcast appears on the sub window in real time.
• If this function is stopped after shifting the sub window, before you press the P in P button again, the sub window will appear
in the last position you set. However, if you turn off the power, the sub window re-appears in the lower right (default) position.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
DVD-VIDEO
Selecting the camera angle
If the scene was recorded with multiple angles, you can easily change the camera angle of the scene you
are watching.
Press ANGLE while playing a scene recorded
OPEN/CLOSE
with multiple angles.
1
DVD
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
While playing a scene recorded with multiple angles, the
angle icon appears on the TV screen and on the front
panel. Press the ANGLE button while the angle icon is
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
ANGLE
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
displayed.
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
Angle icon
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
e.g.
Angle
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
1
/
6
Total number of angles
Current selection
ENTER
Press ADJUST while the angle number is
displayed on the TV screen.
2
You can also select the camera angle by pressing the
ANGLE button several times.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
R
QUICK MENU
Angle
1
/
6
2
3
/
/
6
6
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
6
/
6
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
• The angle icon disappears after about 3 seconds if no
further selections are made.
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Notes
• You can also change the camera angle during still playback. The camera angle changes to the new setting when you resume
normal playback.
• If you pause a picture immediately after changing a camera angle, the resumed playback picture may not display the new
camera angle.
• Depending on the disc, the camera angle may not change even though the angle number changes.
To turn off the angle icon
Set “On screen display” in the setup menu to “Off” (
page 159).
Most of the on-screen display including the angle icon will not appear.
While the angle icon is flashing on the front panel display, you can change the camera angle.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Selecting Subtitles
You can display subtitles on the TV screen and select a subtitle language from those included on the
disc.
Press SUBTITLE during playback.
OPEN/CLOSE
1
DVD
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
The current subtitle setting appears.
e.g.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
SSUBTITLE
Subtitle
Status
1
– –
Setting number and language
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
Off
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
The language code appears instead of the language
name. Refer to the list of languages and their
abbreviations. (
page 171)
ENTER
Press to select “Status,” then press ADJUST
to select “On.”
2
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
Skip to step 3 if “On” is already displayed.
ENTER
QUICK MENU
R
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
Press to select “Subtitle,” then press
ADJUST to select a language.
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
3
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
The subtitles of recorded languages appear.
ENTER
Good evening!
Bonsoir!
R
The display turns off after about 3 seconds if you do not
make a selection.
To turn the subtitles on or off
Notes
• Some DVD video discs are set to display subtitles
automatically.
• Depending on the scene, subtitles may not appear
At step 2, select “Off” by pressing the ADJUST
button.
immediately after you set the subtitle function to on.
• Some DVD video discs will allow you to change subtitle
languages and turn subtitles on or off only via the disc
menu.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Zooming a picture
You can magnify areas within a picture.
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
Press ZOOM.
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
1
2
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
A zoom scope appears.
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
ZOOM
e.g.
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
ENTER
Select a zoom point and magnification level.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
:
Raises the magnification level.
QUICK MENU
:
Lowers the magnification level.
/
/
/
:
Moves the zoom point. (only after the image has been
magnified)
ENTER
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
CLEAR
CLEAR :
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
Returns the zoom point to the center of the picture.
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Notes
• Some discs may not respond to zoom feature.
• During some scenes, the buttons may not work as described.
• The zoom feature is canceled when the disc menu is operated.
• The magnification level varies depending on the picture size you select
(
page 50, in “INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
• The zoom feature is not available while displaying a GUI.
• The zoom feature is canceled when you stop playback or start playback.
VIDEO Plus+ EXTEND REC MODE TV CODE
T.SEARCH
1
2
3
CLEAR
To cancel the zoom
Press ZOOM.
4
5
6
DELETE
7
8
0
9
SETUP
ENTER
+
10
Open the lid.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Selecting the sound
You can select a preferred language and a sound format.
Press AUDIO during playback or while
receiving a broadcast.
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
1
DVD
MENU
RETURN
The current audio setting appears.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
AAUDIO
The language code appears instead of the language
name. Refer to the list of languages and their
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
abbreviations. (
page 171)
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press ADJUST while the audio setting is
displayed on the TV screen.
2
Variation of channels depends on the disc or the type of
TV broadcast.
ENTER
R
HDD
DVD-RAM
, TV channel signals
•
Stereo sound
→ “Stereo” (left channel and right channel)
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
→ “Stereo L” (left channel)
→ “Stereo R” (right channel)
(→ Back to “Stereo”)
QUICK MENU
Dual Mono sound (NICAM)
“Dual L” → “Dual R” → “Dual LR” (→ Back to “Dual L”)
DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
Language name / sound recording system / No. of
channels
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
e.g.
Sound
Output
1
English
PCM
2ch
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
VCD
•
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
“Stereo” → “Stereo L” → “Stereo R” (→ Back to “Stereo”)
The display turns off if you do not operate for more than
3 seconds.
If you press the
select the audio output setting (
the ADJUST button.
/
buttons to select “Output,” you can
MENU
page 158) by using
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Selecting the sound (Continued)
Recorded sounds
According to your setting of “NICAM” on the setup menu screen, (
page 158), the sound is recorded onto different
channels of the disc below. Set “NICAM” to “On” or “Off” appropriately.
Setting on the setup screen
DVD Compatible Mode NICAM
Off
Type of receiving broadcast
Contents of recorded sound
Lch Rch
Type of record
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Mono + NICAM L, R
Mono + NICAM M1, M2
Mono + NICAM M1
Mono
Mono + NICAM L, R
Mono + NICAM M1, M2
Mono + NICAM M1
Mono
Mono + NICAM L, R
Mono + NICAM M1, M2
Mono + NICAM M1
Mono
Mono + NICAM L, R
Mono + NICAM M1, M2
Mono + NICAM M1
Mono
Mono + NICAM L, R
Mono + NICAM M1, M2
Mono + NICAM M1
Mono
Mono + NICAM L, R
Mono + NICAM M1, M2
Mono + NICAM M1
Mono
Mono
Mono
Mono
Mono
L
Mono
Mono
Mono
Mono
R
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Dual Mono*
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
M1
M1
M2
M1
Mono
Mono
Mono
Mono
Mono
L
Mono
Mono
Mono
Mono
Mono
R
On (Mode I)
M1
M1
M1
M1
Mono
Mono
Mono
Mono
Mono
L
M2
M1
Mono
Mono
Mono
Mono
Mono
Mono
R
M2
M1
Mono
On (Mode II)
* This will be “Stereo” when a recording is made with “L-PCM” selected.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes
• Some discs allow you to change audio selections only via the disc menu. If this is the case, press the MENU button and
choose the appropriate language from the selections on the disc menu.
• When you turn on the recorder or replace a disc, the recorder returns to the initial default setting. (
page 154)
Depending on the disc, the sound that is specified the disc is played back.
• Immediately after you have switched sounds, there may be a temporary discrepancy between the display and actual
sound.
• The BITSTREAM/PCM jack may not output NICAM Mode I/II sound you select. In this instance, set “Audio out select” to
“PCM”.
(
page 158)
• You cannot change NICAM sound if recorded with “DVD compatible mode” (
page 162) set to “On”. Even when “DVD
page 162) is set to “Off,” the recorder regards it as “On (Mode I)” when recording to a DVD-R/RW
compatible mode” (
disc.
Output sound conversion table
Audio setting ( page 158) and output in the default setting display
Bitstream Analog 2ch
PCM
Disc
Sound format
Dolby Digital
BITSTREAM/
PCM jack
Analog (L/R)
jacks
BITSTREAM/
Analog (L/R)
jacks
BITSTREAM/
PCM jack
Analog (L/R)
jacks
PCM jack
Bitstream
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
—
Bitstream
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
—
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
96 kHz/16 bit
96 kHz/20 bit
96 kHz/24 bit
—
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
—
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
—
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
96 kHz/16 bit
96 kHz/20 bit
96 kHz/24 bit
DTS
Linear
PCM
DVD-
video
disc*
—
—
Bitstream
Bitstream
MPEG2
Bitstream
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
VIDEO CD
MPEG1
44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit
44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit
Audio
CD
Linear PCM 44.1 kHz/16 bit
DTS
Bitstream
Bitstream
(Noise)
Bitstream
Bitstream
(Noise)
Bitstream
(Noise)
Dolby Digital
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
HDD
Linear PCM 48 kHz/16 bit
Dolby Digital
48 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream
48 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream
DVD-RAM/
R/RW
Linear PCM 48 kHz/16 bit
MPEG2
48 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream
48 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream
MP3/WMA
CD-R/RW
44.1 kHz or 32 kHz or 48 kHz / 16 bit
* “DVD video disc” above does not include DVD-R/RW discs recorded on this recorder.
• Do not select a connection or setting indicated as “Noise” in the above list.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Viewing JPEG files
You can play JPEG files that have been recorded on a CD-R or CD-ROM on the recorder.
Preparations
• Prepare a compatible disc (
page 77) that contains JPEG files you want to view.
• Set “Priority contents” (
page 160) to “Photo”.
• Make your TV shape conform to the 4:3 picture size. Only 4:3 pictures can be played regardless of the function
settings via the on-screen displays of the recorder ( page 50, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”). If the TV is adjusted
to other sizes, e.g. “WIDE,” images will appear to be horizontally expanded. For details, refer to the owner’s
manual of your TV.
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
Press DVD.
TOP MENU
RETURN
1
2
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Load a CD that contains JPEG files.
ENTER
Each photo appears for about 3 seconds (slide show).
OPEN/CLOSE
If a slide show does not start, press the PLAY button.
Depending on the disc, the “CONTENT MENU Picture
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY
List” appears. See “On the “CONTENT MENU Picture
List”” (
page 77) to operate.
R
R
E
EC
C
QUICK MENU
Notes
• Some files may not display their own entire images depending on the size.
• JPEG picture playback is not available during recording on the HDD.
• Operation to JPEG file will be disabled at about 5 minutes before a programmed recording starts.
To stop playback (slide show)
To rotate a picture
Press STOP.
Press ANGLE repeatedly.
If you press the PLAY button after pressing the STOP
button, playback will start from the photo you stopped.
Each time you press the button, the picture rotates by
90° degree.
Notes
• The rotated image is displayed after its original posture
appears momentarily.
To pause playback (slide show)
Press PAUSE.
To resume, press the PAUSE button again or press
the PLAY button.
To magnify a picture
Follow the procedure on
page 72.
To skip photos
Notes
During playback, press the SKIP button repeatedly.
: To skip forward.
• The magnified image is displayed after its original posture
appears momentarily.
• For small pictures, the reduction level may be limited.
: To skip backward.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct input of a photo number
Viewing a specified photo (single view)
Full screen still view.
2 ways are available:
1) During playback or stop, press T.SEARCH.
An input window appears.
e.g.
On the “CONTENT MENU Picture List”
Photo
001
Search
1) Press CONTENT MENU.
The “CONTENT MENU Picture List” appears.
2) Input a photo number using the number buttons
or ADJUST.
Depending on the disc, the recorder creates either
temporary folder, “Auto” or “All”.
3) Press ENTER.
“Auto”: For CD of which compatibility confirmed by
The selected photo appears in full screen.
TOSHIBA. Only playable files are listed.
e.g.
CONTENT
CD
Picture List
Auto
1
/
3
Page
MENU
To change the playback order
001
002
005
008
011
003
006
009
012
DH100001
DH100004
DH100003
DH100002
DH100001
DH100004
DH100001
DH100002
DH100005
004
007
010
1) During playback (slide show) or stop, press
QUICK MENU.
File number
2) Press
/
to select an item, then press ENTER.
buttons.
If you select this icon and press the ENTER button,
upper foldersappear.
1
0
To shift the cursor, press the
/
1
Reverse
Repeat
: To reverse the order.
“All”: For CD other than above. All files are listed.
: To repeat the current folder.
e.g.
CONTENT
MENU
CD
Picture List
1
/
3
Page
All
3) Press ENTER.
001
004
002
005
003
006
DH100001
DH100004
DH100003
DH100002
DH100001
DH100004
DH100001
DH100002
DH100005
Playback in the selected mode starts.
• Some CDs may not comply with the above.
2) Press to select a folder or photo.
JPEG files compatibility
/
/
/
Discs whose compatibility with this recorder has been
confirmed by TOSHIBA are as follows.
Pressing the PICTURE SEARCH (
turns the pages.
/
) button
CANON QuickCD
FUJICOLOR CD
Kodak Picture CD
NORITSU QSS CD
If you press the
thumbnail view (“CONTENT MENU Pictures”).
button, the list changes to
e.g.
CONTENT
CD
Picturs
JPEG
1
/
8
Page
MENU
/ /
JPEG disc compatibility with this recorder is limited as
follows:
• Playable discs:
CD-ROM, CD-R
Pressing the ANGLE button rotates the picture. The
rotation of pictures is kept until the CD is ejected.
CD-RW is not recommendable.
• CD physical format:
Mode 1, Mode 2 XA Form 1
• File system:
ISO9660 Level 1, 2 or Joliet
• File name:
To return to the previous list, press the
again.
button
A file name should be in alphabet and
numerals only, and must incorporate “JPG”
extension.
3) Press ENTER.
If you select a folder at step 2), repeat steps 2) and
3) until your favorite file appears.
e.g.“********.JPG”
The selected photo appears in full screen.
• Total number of folders:
Less than 256
• Total number of files:
Less than 1000
Notes
Some files may not display their own entire image
depending on the size.
• The “CONTENT MENU Picture List” cannot show all the
files in a disc, but only ones regarded as objects of regular
play of the disc.
• The larger the file size is, the longer the thumbnail takes
time to appear.
Some discs may not permit this operation. Especially,
the following conditions of included files will increase
the disc’s disability.
1. Pixels over 5000 x 5000 in height and/or width
2. File format except Exif
• Letters of a file/folder name overflowing the given space
are not displayed.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Playing MP3/WMA files
You can play MP3/WMA files that have been recorded on a CD-R or CD-ROM on this recorder.
Preparations
• Make sure that a disc you want to play is compatible with this recorder. See
page 79.
• Set “Priority contents” (
page 160) to “Audio”.
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
Press DVD.
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
1
2
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Load a CD that contains MP3/WMA files.
ENTER
Playback starts from the first track of a current folder.
If playback does not start, press the PLAY button.
OPEN/CLOSE
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY
R
R
E
EC
C
QUICK MENU
Notes
• WMA tracks copy-protected cannot be played.
• The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT BITSTREAM/PCM jack outputs MP3/WMA sounds in the linear PCM format regardless of the
current “Audio out select” ( page 158) selection.
• You cannot change the playback speed of MP3/WMA playback.
To stop playback
On the “CONTENT MENU Audio List”
Press STOP.
1) Press the CONTENT MENU button.
If you press the PLAY button after pressing the STOP
button, playback will start from the the beginning of the
track.
The “CONTENT MENU Audio List” appears.
Current folder
e.g.
CONTENT
CD
Audio List
MP3
1
/
1
Page
MENU
To pause playback
001
002
005
008
011
003
006
009
012
MP3_0001
MP3_0004
MP3_0007
MP3_0002
MP3_0005
MP3_0008
MP3_0003
MP3_0006
MP3_0009
Press PAUSE.
To resume, press the PAUSE button again or press
the PLAY button.
004
007
010
File number
If you select this icon and press the ENTER button,
upper folders appear.
To skip tracks
During playback, press SKIP repeatedly.
: To skip forward.
e.g.
CONTENT
CD
Audio List
1
/
1
Page
MENU
: To skip backward.
All
JPG_MP3
MP3
MP3a
MP3b
001
004
002
MP3_0001
MP3_0004
MP3_0002
MP3c
Selecting a track in the disc
003
MP3_0003
2 ways are available:
Disc name
The recorder creates temporary
folder “All”, which contains all
playable files.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2) Press
/
/
/
to select a track or folder.
Playable files
Pressing the PICTURE SEARCH (
turns the pages.
/
) button
MP3/WMA disc compatibility with this recorder is
limited as follows:
3) Press ENTER.
• Playable discs:
If you select a folder at step 2), repeat steps 2) and
3) until your favorite file appears.
CD-ROM, CD-R
CD-RW is not recommendable.
• Sampling Frequency / Bitrate:
WMA: 32 kHz / 48 kbps (CBR), VBR
44.1 kHz / 48-192 kbps (CBR), VBR
48 kHz / 128-192 kbps (CBR), VBR
MP3: 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12kHz, 16 kHz,
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz / 8-160 kbps (CBR),
VBR
Notes
• The “CONTENT MENU Autio List” cannot show all the
tracks in a disc, but only ones regarded as objects of
proper play of the disc.
• Letters of a file/folder name overflowing the given space
are not displayed.
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz / 32-320 kbps
(CBR), VBR
• CD physical format:
Direct input of a track number
1) During playback or stop, press T.SEARCH.
Mode 1, Mode 2 XA Form 1
• File system:
An input window appears.
ISO9660 Level 1, 2 or Joliet
• File name:
e.g.
Track
001
Search
A file name should be in alphabet and
numerals only, and must incorporate “MP3” or
“WMA” extension.
2) Input a track number using the number buttons
or the ADJUST button.
e.g.“********.MP3”, “********.WMA”
• Total number of folders:
Less than 256
3) Press ENTER.
• Total number of files:
Less than 1000
• WMA codec version:
To change the playback order
V7, V8, V9
1) During playback or stop, press QUICK MENU.
* This recorder supports ID3v2 (ID3 Tag Version 2) of MP3,
to display text data such as names of title and artist.
Some characters may be displayed properly.
2) Press
/
to select “Special playback mode”,
then press ENTER.
e.g.
This recorder requires discs/recordings to meet certain
technical standards in order to achieve optimal playback
quality. Pre-recorded DVDs are automatically set to
these standards. There are many different types
of recordable disc formats (including CD-R containing
MP3/WMA files). Given the fact that technology in this
area is still maturing, Toshiba cannot guarantee that all
genre of recordable discs will produce optimal playback
quality. The technical criteria set out in this owner’s
manual are meant as a guide only.
Quick Menu
Special playback mode
Exit
Memory
Memory list
Folder repeat
Track repeat
Track random
3) Press
/
to select an item, then press ENTER.
Memory list
: To play favorite tracks only in
a favorite order.
Input a track number by using the number buttons
or the ADJUST button.
Customers should also note that permission is required in
order to download MP3/WMA files and music from the
internet. Toshiba has no right to grant such permission.
Permission should always be sought from the copyright
owner.
To shift the cursor, press the
/
buttons.
Folder repeat
Track repeat
Track random
: To repeat the current folder.
: To repeat the current file.
: To play files in the current
folder in a random order.
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows
Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in both the United
States and other countries.
Notes
• To cancel these modes, stop the playback or select the
cancel command from the Quick Menu.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
Checking the current status and settings
You can confirm operational status and setting details.
Operational status and setting details
Press DISPLAY.
OPEN/CLOSE
1
DVD
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
The following on-screen display appears. (The actual
display varies depending on the disc.)
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
DISPLAY
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
e.g. while playing a DVD-RAM disc
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
Elapsed time of a title/
REC MENU EDIT MENU
Mode indicator
Elapsed time of a chapter
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Operating disc
Title No./
Playback
Chapter No.
mode
Receiving
channel
Status display
ENTER
e.g.
:
:
:
:
00 10 29
002
Title
Chapter
Title
repeat
3
DVD
:
:
0005 00 05 15
Stereo
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
Press DISPLAY again.
QUICK MENU
2
3
An expanded display appears.
(Actual display varies depending on the disc.)
DISPLAY
e.g.
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
Remaining time
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
:
:
:
:
-00 22 01
002
Title
Chapter
Title
repeat
3
DVD
:
:
0005 -00 00 07
Stereo
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
:
Off
SP
Virtual surround
Picture Quality
Audio Quality
Audio
Audio Output
Subtitle
:
:
:
:
:
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
1 S
D/M
te
1
reo R Original
Bitstream
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
– – – Off
Press DISPLAY again to turn the display off.
DISPLAY
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the time bar
The time bar shows the current progress in playback or recording.
ENTER
During playback or recording, press
TIME BAR.
1
The time bar appears. (The actual display varies
depending on the disc.)
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
TIME BAR
Locator (Shows the current location.)
e.g. Playback
QUICK MENU
:
:
:
:
:
:
00 00 00
01 30 00
Location 00 55 00:00F
Chapter division
Elapsed time
Total playing time of a current title
(In the case of a VIDEO CD or
audio CD, it shows the total
playing time of the disc.)
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
Locator (Shows the current location.)
e.g. Recording
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
:
:
:
:
:
:
00 00 00
Location
00 18 00
00 30 00
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Elapsed time Elapsed recording time (per 30 minutes)
(Recording end time if it comes within 30
minutes.)
Note
• Time display is an approximation.
Changing the location of the time bar
While the time bar is displayed, press
/
.
The time bar shifts up and down.
Turning off the time bar
Press TIME BAR.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Functions in the Quick Menu
Besides these examples, various other ones are introduced on respective pages for your convenience.
See
page 24 on how to operate the Quick Menu.
Repeat all ORG titles
To play repeatedly (Repeat playback)
To repeat all original titles in a disc.
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
You can repeat a desired section.
1) During playback, press QUICK MENU.
2) Press to select “Special playback mode”,
Repeat all PL titles
To repeat all playlist titles in a disc.
/
Cancel repeat
then press ENTER.
(in Repeat playback
mode)
Special playback mode
The sub-menu appears. Select the next item by
To resume normal playback.
Playback of the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc stops.
pressing the
/
buttons and the ENTER button.
Notes
A-B repeat
• Some discs may not permit repeat operation.
• You cannot use the repeat playback function in conjunction
with the random playback function.
• If you press the STOP button during repeat playback, this
operation is canceled.
You can designate a portion in a title or track to repeat
continuously.
If you select “A-B repeat” and press the ENTER
button, the following display appears. Perform steps 1
and 2 below.
• While you are performing repeat playback on the HDD or a
DVD-RAM disc, other operations (
except pause play are not available.
pages 64 to 66)
e.g.
A
B
Set A
repeat
To play in random order (Random play)
DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
You can play sections in random order.
1) During playback or stop, press QUICK MENU.
2) Press
/
to select “Special playback mode”,
To cancel the procedure, press the button.
then press ENTER.
1) Press ENTER at the beginning of the segment
(point A) you want to repeat.
Special playback mode
The sub-menu appears. Select the next item by
The location of point A is memorized.
The display changes to “Set B”.
pressing the
/
buttons and the ENTER button.
Title random
Plays all titles in a loaded disc in random order.
Each title is played beginning from chapter 1.
2) Press ENTER at the end of the segment
(point B).
The location of point B is memorized, and repeat
playback begins between point A and B.
Chapter random
Plays all chapters in a current title in random order.
Title repeat
To repeat the same title.
Track random
Plays all tracks on a loaded disc in random order.
Chapter repeat
To repeat the same chapter.
Track repeat
To repeat the same track.
Disc repeat
To repeat the entire disc.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cancel random
Resumes normal playback.
(in Random play mode)
2) Press
step 1).
/
to select the next box, then perform
To select another chapter in the same title, you do
not need to select the title number.
Repeat these steps if necessary.
Notes
• Some discs may not permit random playback operation.
• You cannot use the random playback function in
conjunction with the memory playback function.
• You cannot use the random playback function in
conjunction with the repeat playback function.
• Pressing the STOP button during operation cancels
random playback.
You can program up to 30 selections into memory.
3) Press ENTER.
Memory playback starts.
Memory
(in normal playback
mode)
To display an entry box for one program selection.
To play in favorite order (Memory playback)
DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
You can select 30 titles, chapters, or tracks and play
them in favorite order.
(To play contents in the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc in
favorite order, make a playlist. For details, see
Memory release
mode)
To resume normal playback.
(in memory playback
“Editing” on
1) During playback or stop, press QUICK MENU.
2) Press to select “Special playback mode”,
page 86.)
Memory repeat
mode)
To repeat a current memory playback.
(in memory playback
/
then press ENTER.
Notes
• Some discs may not permit memory playback operation.
• Inputting numbers of titles, chapters or tracks that a disc
does not contain will result in error.
• You cannot program/change selections during memory
playback. To change selections, cancel memory playback
by pressing the STOP button.
Special playback mode
The sub-menu appears. Select the next item by
pressing the
/
buttons and the ENTER button.
Memory list
If you select this and press the ENTER button, the
following display appears. Perform the steps below.
• When you turn off the power, the selected memory is
erased.
• You can exit the memory playback display by pressing the
O button.
e.g.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
1) Input numbers of titles, chapters, or tracks by
using the number buttons, in favorite order.
Input each 3-digit number.
To input a 1- or 2-digit number, first input 0.
(e.g. “0”, “0”, “3”.)
To cancel the numbers, press the CLEAR button.
To input a chapter number, press the
to shift the cursor.
/
buttons
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Functions in the Quick Menu (Continued)
To display the current bit rate
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
1) During playback, press QUICK MENU.
2) Press to select “Bit rate”, then press
ENTER.
Bit rate
/
Note
• To turn off the bit rate display, select this item again.
To check information on a title
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
1) During playback, press QUICK MENU.
2) Press to select “Title information”, then
/
press ENTER.
Title information
To exit the Quick Menu
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
Press QUICK MENU again.
or
Press
/
to select “Exit”, then press ENTER.
Exit
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
You can create your own movie from your assembled
scenes. Save your favorite videos in DVD discs.
Before editing
Creating chapters
Playlist editing
Creating thumbnails
Before dubbing
High speed Library dubbing
Dubbing selected items
Rate conversion dubbing
Line-U dubbing
Deleting selected items
Combine Original titles
Creating a DVD-Video using
DVD-R/RW
DVD-Video finalizing process
DV recording
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Before editing
Be sure to read before performing any editing.
For better use the HDD of this recorder
When you save necessary scenes from recorded contents, it may not be a good method to delete unnecessary
portions from a recorded title in the HDD, then copy the remainder to a DVD-RAM disc.
Repeating this method increases blank spaces in the HDD, on which contents will be recorded discontinuously
(fragmentation in the HDD), resulting in slowdown of the system or incomplete deleting operation, in the worst case,
the system may refuse any commands for play or recording, to protect the damaged HDD.
To delete unnecessary scenes from a title to save, first make a Playlist (virtual title) by collecting necessary scenes,
then copy the Playlist to change it into a new title, finally delete the original one. This method is more simple and can
save your time and reduce possibility of such fragmentation troubles of the HDD.
To avoid HDD fragmentations, it is also recommended that you execute periodically deletion of all titles in the HDD or
initialization of the HDD. Before initializing the HDD, be sure to copy necessary contents to DVD-RAM discs, because
initializing erases all data in the HDD. Library (
page 140) data are also recorded in the HDD. If you do not want to
erase them, copy them into DVD-RAM discs before initializing the HDD. Load the backup DVD-RAM disc into the
recorder after initializing the HDD, copy the data back to the HDD.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing on this recorder
Basic steps of editing
Creating chapters
➔
Programming a Playlist
➔
Dub (Copy) the Playlist (this will create an Original
title of the desired scenes)
Editing is executed by a title and a chapter. Titles and chapters are classified into “Original” and “Playlist.” First, specify
a desired scene by dividing a title (Original) into chapters. Then compile the necessary chapters (Original) in desired
order by programming a Playlist. Then dub (copy) the Playlist on the same disc. This creates a title (Original).
Refer to the following examples about “Playlist” and “Original.”
Example: Creating your own music compilation by collecting songs from music programmes you record from
Monday to Friday.
You can create one title for one recording.
Segment of
songs
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Original title 1
(including one Original chapter)
In the example above, five titles are created, as you recorded programmes five times from Monday to Friday. The
content you recorded is called “Title (Original)”
All chapters in a title (Original) are chapters (Original).
Specify the range (a favorite song) you need in
each title (Original).
Division of chapter
Chapter 1
Division of chapter
Chapter 3
Chapter 2
To specify the range, create a chapter. A segment of
a song becomes one chapter by creating divisions in
a chapter at the beginning and end of a song. In the
example to the right, three chapters (Original) are
created in one title (Original).
Monday
Title (Original) 1
(including three chapters (Original))
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Before editing (Continued)
Compile chapters in a desired order.
You can select any chapter or order of chapters, as
you want. Also you can assign a title to multiple
chapters.
Title (Original) 1
(including three chapters (Original))
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Each element to be compiled is called a part. In the
example to the right, the three chapters in
Wednesday, Friday, and Monday are the parts.
When compiled, the source chapter (Original)
remains as it is in the title (Original).
3
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
1
A new part is not created by copying the source
chapter (Original). It does not contain actual recorded
content but only exists as an informational sub-set of
the chapter name and the playback order (in the right
example, the chapter names are “Monday,
Thursday
Friday
2
Wednesday, and Friday” and the playback order is
“Wednesday→Friday→Monday”).
For actual playback, the contents of the source
chapter (Original) are played. Basically, it is a list for
the recorder to go and find the content.
Chapter
(Playlist) 1
Chapter
(Playlist) 2
Chapter
(Playlist) 3
You can create a part from the Original as many
times as you want and you can make different titles
with the same parts by changing the combination or
order.
For parts, you can use not only chapters like in the
example, but also titles (Original) and other Playlist.
Title (Playlist) 1
(including three chapters (Playlist))
When title (Playlist) 1 is played,
2
,
1
and
are played in order.
3
You can play the actual recorded content, such as titles (Original) and chapters (Original), or by managing the
Originals and parts, you can virtually create a variety of titles without increasing the use of disc space.
These virtual titles or chapters are called “Title (Playlist)” or “Chapter (Playlist)” respectively.
In order to differentiate titles (Playlist) from titles (Original), an Original is displayed on screen as “ORG” and a Playlist
is displayed as “PL”.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make the compiled chapters into a title (Original).
(Dubbing)
Playlist
If you just want to play the compiled chapters in
desired order, you only play the Playlist. If you want to
delete a title (Original) which contains unnecessary
chapters, be sure to dub (copy) the Playlist and make
it into a title (Original).
Chapter
(Playlist) 1
Chapter
(Playlist) 2
Chapter
(Playlist) 3
Title (Playlist) 1
Dubbing (Copying)
You are now converting the virtual file (playlist) into an
actual file that will become a new Original file.
Title
Chapter
Chapter
(Original) 1
Chapter
(Original) 2
(
Original) 3
Title (Original) 1
Notes
• A title (Playlist) or a chapter (Playlist) is based on a title (Original) or a chapter (Original). Therefore changing or deleting a
title (Original) or a chapter (Original) will affect the related title (Playlist) or chapter (Playlist).
• Some recorded content cannot be edited (for example, a title including still images).
• The boundary of the title with unnecessary part deleted and titles (Playlist) having different parts cannot be played back
seamlessly (without break).
Proceed to the practical operations.
See “Creating chapters” (
For the dubbing procedure, see “High speed Library dubbing” (
page 90) and “Playlist editing (Collecting desired scenes)” (
page 106).
page 95).
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
HDD
DVD-RAM
Creating chapters
A recording makes 1 title, which includes 1 chapter. By dividing it into several chapters, it will be easier
to access a desired scene, and your editing or playback will be much easier.
To create chapters in a title, insert a chapter mark. Playback the content, locate a point where you want to divide, then
press the CHP DIVIDE button.You can insert a chapter mark also while recording, by pressing the CHP DIVIDE
button. (A chapter will also be placed in the recording when you pause.)
The point divides the chapter (into two).You can create multiple chapters by repeating the above operation.
Notes
• Chapters cannot be created in the following modes:
Dubbing / Fast-reverse, Fast-forward / Slow-motion
• You cannot divide a title of a DVD-R/RW disc into chapters. It is possible to create chapters in a DVD-R/RW disc by pressing
the CHP DIVIDE button during recording at the desired points, or by selecting an option that inserts chapter marks
automatically during recording at regular intervals. (
page 162)
If you want to modify the chapter division, or want to place a chapter mark more precisely monitoring the
frame counter, follow the procedures below.
During stop, playback or recording, press
CONTENT MENU.
OPEN/CLOSE
1
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
The “CONTENT MENU Title List” appears.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
CONTENT MENU
Pressing the HDD or DVD button can switch the drives.
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press
/
/
/
to select a title.
2
• To go to the next or previous page, press the
PICTURE SEARCH ( ) button.
• To select a chapter, first highlight the title that contains
the chapter you want, then press the button.
ENTER
/
ENTER
The display changes to “CONTENT MENU Chapter
List”.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
To go back to the title display, press the
again.
button
QUICK MENU
Press QUICK MENU.
3
The Quick Menu appears.
e.g.
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
QUICK MENU
CON
ME
1
/
2
Page
HDD
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
Quick Menu
Title information
Create thum
:
:
b
n
a
i
l
7
00
2004/06/08 23 00
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
:
Ch
6
High speed dubbing
Rate conversion dubbing
3:45)
(0:29:50)
Original
l
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
Chapter function
Edit functon
:
:
19 00
2004/07/11
7
00
(0:54:30)
Original
Special playback m
ode
:
Ch
8
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
2:40)
Save captured images
Disc information
l
Display changeover
23 00
Specific page jump
:
:
2004/07/12 21 00
:
Title delete
Exit
Ch 10
0:08)
al
(0:51:28)
Original
PICTURE SEARCH
HDD/DVD
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
press ENTER.
/
to select “Chapter function”, then
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
4
5
6
DVD
MENU
RETURN
The sub-menu appears.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
e.g.
CON
ME
Quick Menu
1
/
2
Page
HDD
:
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
Title information
Create thum
Chapter editing
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
b
n
a
i
l
7
A
uto chapter create04/06/08 23 00
:
EASY
NAVI
Ch
6
High speed dubbing
Rate conversion dubbing
3:45)
(0:29:50)
Original
REC MENU EDIT MENU
l
Chapter function
Edit functon
:
:
19 00
2004/07/11
7
00
(0:54:30)
Original
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Special playback m
ode
:
Ch
8
2:40)
Save captured images
Disc information
l
Display changeover
23 00
Specific page jump
:
:
2004/07/12 21 00
:
Title delete
Exit
Ch 10
0:08)
Original
(0:51:28)
Original
ENTER
Press
/
to select “Chapter editing”, then
press ENTER.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
The EDIT MENU Chapter Editing display appears.
e.g.
EDIT
HDD
Chapter Editing
QUICK MENU
MENU
ENTER
Fishing Guide
Original
:
Aspect Ratio
4
3
:
:
:
Location 00 00 00 03F
Divide
To create new chapter, select
desired start point via remote.
To set, press enter.
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
:
:
:
:
:
:
Title 004
Chapter 0001
00 00 00
00 54 30
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
Press PLAY to start playback.
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Locate a scene where you want to insert a chapter mark.
PLAY
You can use the following buttons.
PICTURE SEARCH, SLOW, SKIP, PAUSE,
FRAME/ADJUST, etc.
PICTURE SEARCH
PAUSE
SKIP
The locator shows the current position on the time bar.
And the live video plays in the upper left.
FRAME
SLOW
• To access other chapters:
Press the
/
buttons to move to the thumbnail
display, then press the
desired thumbnail.
/
buttons to select a
To go to the next page, press the PICTURE SEARCH
button.
• You can confirm the first and last scenes of a chapter.
Select a thumbnail and press the ENTER button.
3 seconds of the first and last scenes are played.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Creating chapters (Continued)
At a point where you want to make a chapter
division, press PAUSE.
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
7
8
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
The picture pauses.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
PAUSE
e.g.
EDIT
HDD
Chapter Editing
MENU
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
Fishing Guide
Original
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
:
Aspect Ratio
4
3
EASY
NAVI
:
:
:
Location 00 00 21 24F
Divide
REC MENU EDIT MENU
To create new chapter, select
desired start point via remote.
To set, press enter.
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
:
:
:
:
:
:
Title 004
Chapter 0001
00 00 00
00 54 30
ENTER
Press
/
/
/
to select “Divide,” then press
ENTER.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
A chapter division is created at the selected location,
and the first scene of the new chapter is registered as a
chapter thumbnail.
QUICK MENU
ENTER
e.g.
EDIT
HDD
Chapter Editing
MENU
Fishing Guide
Original
:
Aspect Ratio
4
3
:
:
:
Location 00 00 21 24F
Divide
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
To create new chapter, select
desired start point via remote.
To set, press enter.
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
:
:
:
:
:
:
Title 004
Chapter 0001
00 00 00
00 54 30
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Repeat steps 6 to 8.
9
Locations of chapter division are indicated by the markers on the
time bar.
To erase a chapter division, see “Merging chapters” (
page 94).
When all chapter divisions have been made,
press .
10
The recorder displays a message, and starts saving the
chapter divisions on the time bar.
When complete, the CONTENT MENU returns.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes
Editing chapter break
You can adjust positions of chapter marks. You can
shift the beginning of a chapter currently selected.
• This recorder supports a limited number of chapters on a
disc. If exceeded, a message appears. In this event,
reduce the number of chapters by merging chapters. (
page 94)
• The “EDIT MENU Chapter Editing” can also be viewed by
selecting “Chapter Editing” from the “EDIT MENU Main
Menu”.
1) Perform steps 1 to 5 on
2) Press QUICK MENU.
page 90 to 91.
3) Press
mode”, then press ENTER.
4) Press to select the item, then press
ENTER.
/
to select “Chapter break edit
/
e.g.
EDITMain Menu
HDD
MENU
Source
Chapter Editing
DV Recording
Chapters can be divided on frame
basis. Chapters can be merged and
assigned names.
Chapter Editing
“by frame (VR mode)”
Edit Functions
Playlist Editing
The chapter mark shifts by one frame.
For contents which will be copied to DVD-RAM
discs.
Title
1
Merge
Divide
Dub Selected Items
Rate Conv. Items
Combine ORG Title
DVD-Video Creation
DVD-Video Finalizing
Del Selected Items
1
2
3
4
5
“by GOP (Video mode)”
The chapter mark shifts by a GOP (about 0.5
second), which is a unit of editing in DVD-Video
format.
• To exit the “EDIT MENU Main Menu”, press the EDIT
MENU button.
• Making chapters in a title (Original) does not affect the
related titles (Playlist).
• There may be a small difference between a location you
marked and a chapter division actually played.
• Pausing a recording automatically creates a chapter
division.
For contents which wiil be copied to DVD-R/RW.
5) Press
beginning you want to shift.
6) Press FRAME (II II) repeatedly until a
/
to select a chapter whose
/
desired scene appears.
Select a point while monitoring the thumbnail,
which changes as you press the button.
• During relay recording (
automatically created at the start point of relay record.
• During an A-B recording ( page 48), if the recorder
page 48), a chapter division is
To operate other chapters, press the
/
buttons
to select another, then follow the above steps.
has to record all content onto the HDD, a chapter division
is automatically created at a point that corresponds to the
beginning of side of a DVD-RAM disc.
• If you create chapters in a title which is stored in the HDD
and copy the title to a DVD-R/RW, the chapter divisions
may shift.
7) When complete, press QUICK MENU, and
select “Chapter break edit mode off (by
frame)” or “Chapter Break Edit Mode off (by
GOP)” then press ENTER.
The recorder exits the adjusting mode.
Creating chapters automatically when
recording
You can create chapter marks from the beginning of
a title at regular intervals automatically. (Chapter
marks are added to those already existing.)
This is convenient for long programs, such as live
sports games.
Notes
• You cannot shift a chapter mark beyond the adjacent
chapter marks or a logical gap on recorded data within a
chapter.
• Shifting a chapter mark restores a thumbnail to the
beginning of a chapter. This may occur also on the
previous chapter depending on the data condition.
1) Perform steps 1 to 4 on
2) Press to select “Auto chapter create”,
then press ENTER.
pages 90 to 91.
/
3) Press
/
to select a chapter division
interval, then press ENTER.
Chapter divisions are automatically marked at the
selected intervals.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Creating chapters (Continued)
Notes
Merging chapters
• To turn off the “EDIT MENU Main Menu”, press the EDIT
MENU button.
1) Perform steps 1 to 5 on
pages 90 to 91, to
view the EDIT MENU Chapter Editing display.
• When chapters are merged, the numerical value of
following chapters will decrease correspondingly.
• Merging chapters does not affect the related titles
(Playlist).You can also merge chapters in the title (Playlist).
In this case, the title (Original) is not affected.
• You can access the feature of merging chapters also from
the Quick Menu on the “CONTENT MENU Chapter List”.
2) Press to highlight a chapter.
/
/
/
Pressing the PICTURE SEARCH button can
access preceding or following pages.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
e.g.
EDIT
HDD
Quick Menu
M
003/06/10 17:09 Ch:3
Original
Chapter break edit mode
Merge with previous cptr
Merge with following cptr
Merge all chapters
Auto chapter create
Edit chapter name
:
Aspect Ratio
4
3
Naming a chapter
:
:
:
ocation 00 00 00 03F
Divide
1) From the “EDIT MENU Chapter Editing”, select
To create new chapter, select
desired start point via remote.
To set, press enter.
a chapter which you want to name.
Exit
2) Press QUICK MENU.
:
:
:
:
00 00 00
00 54 30
Title: 002 Chapter: 0004
3) Press
/
/
/
to select “Edit Chapter
Name”, then press ENTER.
A keyboard appears.
Enter a name following the on-screen icon guides.
4) Press
/
to select an item.
Merge with previous cptr:
To delete the chapter division between the selected
chapter and the previous one.
Notes
• There is a limit to the number of chapters which can be
named. If exceeded, a message appears.
Merge with following cptr:
To delete the chapter division between the selected
chapter and the succeeding one.
• You can also access the keyboard to enter a chapter name
by selecting a chapter with the PICTURE SEARCH button
on the “CONTENT MENU Title Information”, and by
selecting “Edit chapter name” from the Quick Menu on the
“CONTENT MENU Chapter List”.
Merge all chapters:
To merge all chapters in the title.
• You can change chapter names also on a DVD-R/RW disc,
if the disc is not finalized yet.
5) Press ENTER.
e.g. When “Merge with previous cptr” is selected:
The selected chapter is merged into the previous
chapter and its thumbnail is erased.
e.g.
EDIT
HDD
Chapter Editing
MENU
2003/06/10 17:09 Ch:3
Original
:
Aspect Ratio
4
3
:
:
:
Location 00 00 00 03F
Divide
To create new chapter, select
desired start point via remote.
To set, press enter.
:
:
:
:
00 00 00
00 54 30
Title: 002 Chapter: 0004
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
HDD
DVD-RAM
Playlist editing
(Collecting desired scenes)
Create a “Playlist” to omit unnecessary scenes for dubbing, or compile desired scenes.
During stop, playback or recording, press
OPEN/CLOSE
CONTENT MENU.
1
DVD
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
The “CONTENT MENU Title List” appears.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
CONTENT MENU
Pressing the HDD or DVD button can switch the drives.
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press QUICK MENU.
2
The Quick Menu appears.
e.g.
ENTER
QUICK MENU
CON
ME
1
/
2
Page
HDD
Quick Menu
Title information
Create thum
:
:
b
n
a
i
l
7
00
2004/06/08 23 00
:
Ch
6
High speed dubbing
Rate conversion dubbing
3:45)
(0:29:50)
Original
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
l
Chapter function
Edit functon
:
:
19 00
2004/07/11
7
00
(0:54:30)
Original
Special playback m
ode
:
Ch
8
2:40)
Save captured images
Disc information
QUICK MENU
l
Display changeover
23 00
Specific page jump
:
:
2004/07/12 21 00
:
Title delete
Exit
Ch 10
0:08)
ial
(0:51:28)
Original
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
Press
press ENTER.
/
to select “Edit function”, then
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
3
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
The sub-menu appears.
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
e.g.
CON
ME
Quick Menu
1
/
2
Page
HDD
ENTER
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Title information
Create thum
Playlist editing
:
:
b
n
a
i
l
7
Original title comb
i
n
a
ti
o
n
08 23 00
High speed dubbing
Rate conversion dubbing
Playlist(Mon-Fri)
3:4
0:29:50)
Playlist(everyweek)
l
Original
Chapter function
Edit functon
:
:
19 00
2004/07/11
7
00
(0:54:30)
Original
Special playback m
ode
:
Ch
8
2:40)
Save captured images
Disc information
HDD/DVD
l
Display changeover
23 00
Specific page jump
:
:
2004/07/12 21 00
:
Title delete
Exit
Ch 10
0:08)
Orinal
(0:51:28)
Original
(Continued)
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Playlist editing (Continued)
Press
press ENTER.
/
to select “Playlist editing”, then
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
4
5
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
The “EDIT MENU Playlist Editing” appears.
e.g.
EDIT Playlist Editing
HDD
Source:Title
MENU
Original
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
ENTER
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Object :Title
PlayList
Start
Entire Time:
Title:
ENTER
Press
/
/
/
to select a title or chapter
.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
To select between titles and chapters, press the
button.
e.g.
EDIT Playlist Editing
QUICK MENU
HDD
Source:Title
MENU
Original
ENTER
Object :Title
PlayList
Start
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
Entire Time:
Title:
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
A
B
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Press ENTER.
6
A cursor appears, indicating the point where the
selected item will be inserted.
ENTER
e.g.
EDIT Playlist Editing
HDD
Source:Title
MENU
Original
Object :Title
PlayList
Start
Cursor
Entire Time:
Title:
A
B
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
/
to select a point where you want to
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
insert the item, then press ENTER.
7
DVD
MENU
RETURN
If there are no parts in the lower area, leave the cursor
to the left and press the ENTER button.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
The selected part is inserted at the location of the
cursor.
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
e.g.
EDIT Playlist Editing
HDD
Source:Title
MENU
Original
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Object :Title
00:13:45
PlayList
Start
ENTER
Entire Time:
2004/05/07 10:30
Title:
A
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
Repeat steps 5 to 7 to insert items.
QUICK MENU
8
9
To cancel the selection, see “Cancelling selection of a part”
page 98).
(
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
When all items have been inserted, press .
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
The recorder displays a message, and starts saving the
Playlist.
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
When complete, the “CONTENT MENU” returns.
Notes
• You can access the “EDIT MENU Playlist Editing” also by selecting “Playlist Editing” on the “EDIT MENU”.
• If you delete titles and chapters (Original), the corresponding titles and chapters (Playlist) are also deleted. Contrarily, if you
delete titles and chapters (Playlist), the corresponding titles and chapters (Original) are not deleted.
• Playback may pause if a gap between the content is played.
• There may be a small difference between the chapter boundary and the actual playback picture.
• A title or chapter which is being edited cannot be selected as an item.
• You cannot add a title of still pictures, or a title or a chapter which contains both still and moving pictures, to a playlist.
• By copying (dubbing) a Playlist, a title (Original) of the same contents is created.
• You cannot program a Playlist of contents recorded on a DVD-R/RW disc. To make a Playlist using contents of DVD-RW
discs, copy them to the HDD beforehand.
• Down arrow on the thumbnails means: Orange: This title already selected. Green trimmed: Some chapters in this title already
selected. Green: This chapter already selected.
• A black thumbnail with “Recording” means that the title is being recorded or its recording will start within 15 seconds. This
thumbnail cannot start playback.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Playlist editing (Continued)
Note
Cancelling selection of a part
• You cannot edit a title (Playlist) of still pictures, or a title
(Playlist) which contains both still and moving pictures.
1) From the “EDIT MENU Playlist Editing”, press
/
/
/
to select a part to cancel.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
Using a part in a Playlist also in another Playlist
3) Press
/
to select “Cancel selected title”,
1) In play or stop mode of a Playlist title, press
EDIT MENU.
then press ENTER.
The part you have selected is cancelled.
The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.
2) Press
then press ENTER.
The “EDIT MENU Playlist Editing” appears.
/
/
/
to select “Playlist editing,”
Confirming the first and last scenes of a part or
a Playlist
You can play the first and last 3 seconds of a scene
(Preview). (If a title contains several chapters, the first
and last scenes of the chapters are also played.)
3) Press to select “Start” then press
/
/
/
ENTER.
The areas of title name and part selection become
blank.
Preview of a part:
4) Following the procedures outlined on
96, make a Playlist.
page
1) At step 5 on
chapter, then press QUICK MENU.
2) Press to select “Preview”, then press
ENTER.
page 96, select a title or a
/
Naming a title (Playlist)
Preview of all parts:
1) From the “EDIT MENU Playlist Editing”, move a
cursor to the lower side (selected parts) then
press QUICK MENU.
1) Move the cursor to an any part (in the lower
area), then press QUICK MENU.
2) Press
/
to select “Edit title name,” then
2) Press
/
to select “Preview all playlists”,
press ENTER.
then press ENTER.
A keyboard appears.
3) Following the procedures outlined on
30, enter a title name.
page
Confirming the title information
1) At step 5 on
page 96, select a title or a
Note
chapter, then press QUICK MENU.
• You can name a title also while viewing its information.
From the “CONTENT MENU Title List”, select a title and
press the QUICK MENU button then select “Title
2) Press
/
to select “Title information” then
press ENTER.
information” by the
Further press the QUICK MENU button, and select “Edit
title name” by the buttons and the ENTER button.
/
buttons and the ENTER button.
/
Correcting a Playlist
You can add or delete parts to correct a Playlist.
1) From the CONTENT MENU, select a Playlist to
correct.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
3) Press
/
to select “Playlist re-editing” and
then press ENTER.
The “EDIT MENU Playlist Editing” appears.
Follow the procedure from steps 5 on
add or delete parts as necessary.
page 96,
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making a Playlist of recorded contents where
starting times are the same (i.e. daily or weekly
recordings)
This will help to sort serials.
1) From the “CONTENT MENU Title List”, press
QUICK MENU.
2) Press
ENTER.
3) Press
/
to select “Edit function”, then press
/
to select the item.
“Playlist(Mon-Fri)”
To sort out programs recorded on the same time on
Monday to Friday to make a Playlist.
“Playlist(every week)”
To sort out programs recorded on the same time of
the same day of the week to make a Playlist.
4) Press ENTER.
Notes
• Only titles (Original) can be sorted.
• The maximum number of sorted titles is 99.
• If you modify the recording start time or date of one of the
recorded serials, the title will not be sorted out. Contrarily,
any program can be sorted if its channel, recording start
time and date are modified as the same as others.
• “Playlist(Mon-Fri)” can sort titles even if they are not
complete 5 collections of Monday to Friday, on condition
that they have the same channel and recording start time,
and any recording date except Saturday and Sunday.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Creating thumbnails
(Changing the picture on the “CONTENT MENU”)
You can register your favorite scene as a thumbnail displayed on the “CONTENT MENU”.
On a finalized DVD-R/RW disc, this feature is not available.
During stop or playback, press CONTENT
OPEN/CLOSE
MENU.
1
DVD
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
The “CONTENT MENU Title List” appears.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
CONTENT MENU
e.g.
CONTENT
MENU
Title List
:
1
/
2
Page
HDD
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
HDD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
:
:
2004/06/08
7
00
(0:53:45)
Original
2004/06/08 23 00
EASY
NAVI
:
:
Ch
4
Ch
6
(0:29:50)
Original
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
:
:
2004/06/12 19 00
2004/07/11
7
00
(0:54:30)
Original
:
:
Ch
3
Ch
8
(0:52:40)
Original
:
:
2004/07/12 23 00
2004/07/12 21 00
:
:
Ch
4
Ch 10
(0:30:08)
(0:51:28)
Original
Original
ENTER
Pressing the HDD or DVD button can switch the drives.
Press
/
/
/
to select a title whose
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
thumbnail you want to change.
2
3
• To go to the next or previous page, press the
QUICK MENU
PICTURE SEARCH (
/
) button.
• To select a chapter, select a title and press the
ENTER
button. The “Chapter List” appears.
By pressing the
Title List.
button again, you can return to the
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
Press QUICK MENU.
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
The Quick Menu appears.
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
QUICK MENU
e.g.
CON
ME
Quick Menu
1
/
2
Page
HDD
Title information
Create thum
:
:
b
n
a
i
l
7
00
2004/06/08 23 00
:
Ch
6
High speed dubbing
Rate conversion dubbing
3:45)
(0:29:50)
Original
l
Chapter function
Edit functon
:
:
19 00
2004/07/11
7
00
(0:54:30)
Original
Special playback m
ode
:
Ch
8
PICTURE SEARCH
HDD/DVD
2:40)
Save captured images
Disc information
l
Display changeover
23 00
Specific page jump
:
:
2004/07/12 21 00
:
Title delete
Exit
Ch 10
0:08)
al
(0:51:28)
Original
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
/
to select “Create thumbnail”
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
(or “Create CHP thumbnail” if selected a
chapter at step 2), then press ENTER.
4
DVD
MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
The “CONTENT MENU Create thumbnail” display
appears.
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
ENTER
e.g.
CONTENT
MENU
Create thumbnail
HDD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
:
2004/06/08 23:00 Ch
Original
6
(0:29:50)
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
:
:
:
Location 00 00 00 03F
Select desired thumbnail image via
remote. To set, press enter.
:
:
:
:
:
:
00 00 00
00 54 30
Title 002
Chapter 0001
ENTER
Press PLAY to start playback.
5
6
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
Locate a scene you want to capture as a thumbnail.
You can use the following buttons.
PICTURE SEARCH, FRAME, SLOW, SKIP, PAUSE,
etc.
PLAY
QUICK MENU
At the point where you want to capture a
thumbnail image, press PAUSE.
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
e.g.
CONTENT
MENU
Create thumbnail
HDD
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
PAUSE
:
2004/06/08 23:00 Ch
Original
6
(0:29:50)
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
:
:
:
Location 00 06 25 23F
Select desired thumbnail image via
remote. To set, press enter.
:
:
:
:
:
:
00 00 00
00 29 50
Title 002
Chapter 0001
PICTURE SEARCH
SKIP
FRAME
SLOW
Press ENTER.
7
The “CONTENT MENU” returns. The selected scene is
displayed as a thumbnail.
Note
ENTER
e.g.
CONTENT
• There may be a small difference
between a thumbnail made on the
“Create thumbnail” display and that
displayed in the “CONTENT MENU”.
Operation with the PICTURE
SEARCH button may extend the
difference.
Title List
:
1
/
2
Page
HDD
MENU
HDD
:
:
2004/06/08
7
00
(0:53:45)
Original
2004/06/08 23 00
:
:
Ch
4
Ch
6
(0:29:50)
Original
:
:
2004/06/12 19 00
2004/07/11
7
00
(0:54:30)
Original
:
:
Ch
3
Ch
8
(0:52:40)
Original
:
:
2004/07/12 23 00
2004/07/12 21 00
:
:
Ch
4
Ch 10
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Creating thumbnails (Continued)
Notes
• You cannot create thumbnails of chapters in a title that
contains a still picture.
• If you create a chapter thumbnail, and then shift the
chapter mark (
page 93) or record or edit the disc on
other devices, the chapter thumbnail may return to the top
of the chapter.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Before dubbing
You can dub (copy or move) contents recorded in the HDD or DVD-RAM/R/RW, between HDD and DVD-RAM
drive or within the same drives.
The following contains information and notes about dubbing. Read carefully before dubbing.
– When you recorded a content while “DVD
compatible mode” ( page 162) was set to
Dubbing operations
This recorder has the following dubbing functions.
“Off”, and you cannot copy it to a DVD-R/RW in
the DVD-Video format; or when a DVD-RAM
disc was recorded with the other equipment
which is not compatible with this recorder’s
recording format, and you want to copy it to a
DVD-R/RW (→ Set “DVD compatible mode” to
“On (Mode I)” or “On (Mode II)”.)
High speed dubbing
You can copy recorded contents without changing
the picture and sound quality.
“High speed” means the dubbing time is shorter
than the actual time of the content.
Use this function on the purposes such as the
followings:
Rate conversion dubbing of several parts
You can select titles and chapters and change the
data size and copy them all at once.
– when you copy a whole title to a DVD-RAM/R/
RW disc.
Use this function when you unify the compatibility
of several titles and contents all at once.
– when you convert a Playlist into an Original title
(produce an Original title from a Playlist)
Line-U dubbing
– when you copy contents recorded in DVD-VR
mode from a DVD-RW to the HDD.
You can record pictures recorded which is being
played.
Use this function when you want to copy contents
in DVD-R/RW recorded on other device, which
cannot show thumbnails in a “CONTENT MENU
Title List”, to the HDD.
High speed dubbing of several contents - “Dub
selected items”
You can select titles and chapters and copy them
all at once.
Rate conversion dubbing
All the above functions can copy data as original
digital signals. “Rate conversion dubbing” and “Line-
U dubbing”, however, needs data processing and
may deteriorate the original picture and sound
quality. Also, it is not possible to improve the picture
and sound quality by the Rate conversion dubbing at
increased bit rate.
You can copy a content, changing its data size to a
different data one with which the content was
recorded.
Use this function on the purposes such as the
followings:
– When you have recorded a content on the HDD
at a high rate (“MN (Manual)”), and you cannot
copy it to a DVD-RAM disc because the data size
is too large. (→ Reduce the data size.)
High speed
Library
dubbing
High speed
Library
dubbing of
several parts
Rate
conversion
dubbing
Rate
Line-U
dubbing
conversion
dubbing of
several parts
From
HDD
To
HDD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DVD-RAM
DVD-R/RW
(Not finalized yet)
DVD-RAM
DVD-R/RW
HDD
DVD-RAM
HDD
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
DVD-R/RW
• It is not possible to copy to a DVD-RW of DVD-VR mode.
• “High speed dubbing” between the HDD and a DVD-R/RW recorded on other equipment is not possible.
• “High speed dubbing” to a finalized DVD-R/RW is not possible.
• “Line-U dubbing” using a DVD-R/RW which was recorded on other equipment and is not finalized yet is not possible.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Before dubbing (Continued)
Notes
“Copy” and “Move”
• If either the HDD or DVD-RAM is not in optimum physical
condition, an error may occur when you execute “Move”
and some titles or chapters may be lost. If you want to
“Move” non-copy-protected titles and chapters, it is
recommended for safety that you first “Copy” them to the
opposite drive and confirm they have been copied properly.
Then delete the titles and chapters to which you have
executed “Move”.
This recorder’s “Dubbing” has the following two
definitions:
Copy:
The original programme remains after the operation
is completed.
Move:
The moved programme will be erased from the
original location after the operation is completed.
• The recorder cannot copy/move the following discs:
DVD-VIDEO
Whether or not you select either command depends
entirely on the given situation. The command may be
predetermined in some situations.
VIDEO CD
Audio CD
CD-R
CD-RW
You cannot “move” contents in the following situations.
(Instead, you will want to “copy” them.)
• If you cannot copy/move for some other reason, such as
insufficient disc capacity, etc., a message will appear on
screen. In such a case, follow the instructions in the
message.
• Depending on the content, associated information such as
data management may not be copied/moved.
• You cannot copy/move titles containing still pictures.
• Dubbing to DVD-R/RW may divide the original title
depending on the contents. Also, the DVD-Video format
•
The content is protected (
page 50).
•
A specified portion of the title (chapter) is copy-
protected, in which case, you cannot move from
DVD-RAM to the HDD.
•
You cannot move a Playlist. (
page 87) Only
copying is permitted. When you copy a Playlist to a
disc, it will be treated an Original on the disc. The
original Playlist does not change to an Original.
recording (
page 122) may shift thumbnails.
• A part with aspect ratio 16:9 recorded at bit rate 1.4Mbps
cannot be dubbed to a DVD-R/RW. Change the aspect
ratio to 4:3.
• “High speed dubbing” (
items” ( page 108) procedures always comply with
“Aspect ratio(video mode)” setting ( page 162).
Also, you cannot “move” or “copy” contents in the
following situations:
page 106) and “Dub selected
•
The recorded content contains a programme that
permits a single copy only.
•
The title (Playlist) contains a portion that prohibits
copying. Edit the title from the Original and create a
new Playlist.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and playback during a dubbing
Dubbing process by “High speed dubbing” and “Dub selected items” procedures will allow you to make a recording
or playback of other titles.
DVD
DVD
HDD
HDD
Playback
Recording
Recording
Playback
Available
Not available
Not available
Available
Available
Not available
Not available
Available
Not available
Not available
Available
Not available
Not available
Available
HDD
DVD
HDD
DVD
DVD
HDD
HDD
DVD
Not available
Not available
Notes
• Timer programmed recording have priority over other operations. Dubbing may be stopped if a timer program recording
starts.
• While recording during dubbing, the “CONTENT MENU” and the “LIBRARY MENU” cannot appear.
• Playing a recorded title while recording another on the same disc (
page 36), is not possible while dubbing.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
High speed Library dubbing
(Dubbing only a specified part)
This section explains how to dub a spefific title or chapter. To select several parts and dub them all at
once, refer to
page 108.
During playback or stop, press CONTENT
MENU.
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
1
DVD
MENU
RETURN
The “CONTENT MENU Title List” appears.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
CONTENT MENU
e.g.
CONTENT
MENU
Title List
:
1
/
2
Page
HDD
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
HDD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
:
:
2004/06/08
7
00
(0:53:45)
Original
2004/06/08 23 00
EASY
NAVI
:
:
Ch
4
Ch
6
(0:29:50)
Original
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
:
:
2004/06/12 19 00
2004/07/11
7
00
(0:54:30)
Original
:
:
Ch
3
Ch
8
(0:52:40)
Original
:
:
2004/07/12 23 00
2004/07/12 21 00
:
:
Ch
4
Ch 10
(0:30:08)
(0:51:28)
Original
Original
ENTER
Press
/
/
/
to select a part (a title or
chapter) to copy or move.
2
3
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
• You can go forward/back to pages by pressing the
PICTURE SEARCH ( ) button.
/
QUICK MENU
You can jump to a page by specifying the page
number.
ENTER
Press the QUICK MENU button, select “Specific page
jump”. Use the ADJUST button to change the page
number.
• To select a chapter, highlight a title and press the
button. If you press the button again, the title list re-
appears.
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
Press QUICK MENU then select “High speed
dubbing” by pressing from the Quick
Menu, then press ENTER.
/
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
The “CONTENT MENU High Speed Library Dubbing”
QUICK MENU
appears.
e.g.
CONTENT
ADJUST
High Speed Library Dubbing
MENU
(0:52:40)
Original
Copy
:
:
2004/06/10 21 00 Ch
4
PICTURE SEARCH
(Saves Original)
ENTER
Move
(Deletes Original)
Same Disc
(Saves Original)
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
Disc”.
/
to select “Copy”, “Move” or “Same
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
4
5
DVD
MENU
RETURN
Copy:
After the operation is completed, a specified part will
remain on the disc where it was previously located.
Move:
A part will move to the opposite disc and will be erased
from the disc where it was previously located.
Same Disc:
A part will be copied to the same disc and the copied
part will become another title.
This operation is useful to change a Playlist to Original.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
“Copy” or “Move” is automatically selected in the
following cases.
Copy:
When a specified title (or chapter) is a Playlist.
When a specified title (or chapter) is locked (
ENTER
page 50).
Move:
When a specified title (or chapter) is copy-protected.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
Press ENTER.
QUICK MENU
Copying starts.
The job progress is displayed on the screen and the
front panel display.
When the job finishes, the graph disappears and the
buzzer sounds.
ENTER
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
You can set the recorder to turn off automatically when
the job finishes.
QUICK MENU
(1) During the operation, press the QUICK MENU button.
(2) Press the
/
buttons to select “Auto power off”.
(3) Press the ENTER button.
Notes
• A title or a chapter becomes a title by being copied.
• “Same Disc” job using a DVD-RAM disc will take a longer time.
• “Same Disc” is not available on DVD-R/RW.
• “Move” is not available between the HDD and DVD-R/RW.
• Some parts in DVD-R/RW may be divided if dubbed.
• For a copy-once permitted content, only moving from the HDD to a DVD-RAM disc is available. Executing this will delete the
original content in the HDD, and the one moved to a DVD-RAM will not be able to moved or copied.
• “High speed dubbing” is not available between the HDD and DVD-R/RW recorded on other equipment.
• If you record a title directly onto a DVD-R/RW in the DVD-Video mode on this recorder and execute “High speed dubbing” on
the title to the HDD, the recorder may display a message to initialize the HDD. In this case, delete the title or execute “All
HDD titles delete” (
page 163).
To cancel copying halfway through the
operation
Notes
• Cancellation of a copying operation will result in deletion of
a portion of the title or chapter already copied.
• Cancellation of a copying to a DVD-R cannot restore the
disc space in the DVD-R.
1) During copying, press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
2) Press
/
to select “Cancel dubbing”, then
press ENTER.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Dubbing selected items
(Dubbing specified parts together)
This section explains how to copy several specific titles or chapters. Assigned names of titles/chapters
or other information can also be copied. A title or chapter becomes a title by being copied.
Preparation
• Press the HDD or DVD button to select a disc that contains titles or chapters you want to copy.
During playback or stop, press EDIT MENU.
OPEN/CLOSE
1
DVD
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
EDIT MENU
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press
/
to select “Dub Selected Items”.
2
ENTER
ENTER
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
QUICK MENU
Press ENTER.
3
The “EDIT MENU Dub Selected Items” appears.
e.g.
EDIT Dub Selected Items
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
HDD
Title
MENU
Original
ENTER
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
Source will be Title.
Capacity
Dubbing Media: DVD
Start
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Thumbnails of the parts in the disc are displayed in the
upper area.
HDD/DVD
To change the dubbing destination:
1) Press the QUICK MENU button.
2) Press the
/
buttons to select “Change media to
HDD” or “Change Media to DVD”.
3) Press the ENTER button.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
chapter) to copy.
/
/
/
to select a part (a title or
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
4
DVD
MENU
RETURN
• To go to the next or previous page, press the
PICTURE SEARCH ( ) button.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
/
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
• To select a chapter, first select the title that contains
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
the chapter you want, then press the
To go back to the title display, press the
again.
button.
button
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
e.g.
EDIT Dub Selected Items
HDD
Title
MENU
Original
ENTER
Source will be Title.
Dubbing Media: DVD
Press ENTER.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
5
6
QUICK MENU
A cursor appears in the lower area (destination media).
e.g.
EDIT Dub Selected Items
HDD
Title
MENU
Original
ENTER
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
Source will be Title.
Capacity
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
Dubbing Media: DVD
Start
Cursor
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Press
/
to select a location to place the
selected part, then press ENTER.
If there are no parts in the lower area, leave the cursor
to the left and press the ENTER button.
ENTER
The selected part is inserted into the location of the
cursor.
PICTURE SEARCH
e.g.
EDIT Dub Selected Items
HDD
Title
MENU
Original
Source will be Title.
Dubbing Media: DVD
Start
Capacity
B
(Continued)
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Dubbing selected items (Dubbing specified parts together) (Continued)
Repeat steps 4 to 6.
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
7
8
DVD
MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
You can confirm the available space of the destination media via
the bar at the bottom of the display.
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
Each of the collected parts is recorded on the destination media
as a title.
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
• To cancel selection of an individual part, see
page 111.
Press
/
to select “Start”, press ENTER, and
select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
ENTER
The broadcast picture appears and dubbing starts.
The progress for each title is displayed on the screen
and in the front panel display on the recorder. The
ENTER
buzzer sounds when the operation is completed.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
You can set the recorder to turn off automatically when
the job is completed.
QUICK MENU
1) During the job, press the QUICK MENU button.
2) Press the
/
buttons to select “Auto power off”.
3) Press the ENTER button.
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
QUICK MENU
TV
Notes
• This procedure of “Dub Selected Items” of specified parts does not move them. If you do not want to leave the items on the
original disc, delete them in the procedure for “Deleting selected items” ( page 118).
• To confirm the contents of an item, first select the item by using the buttons and press the QUICK MENU button
to display the Quick Menu. Press the buttons to select “Preview” (or ”Title information”) then press the ENTER button.
/
/
/
/
• Each part, when selected, shows its name at the bottom of the menu for about 2 seconds.
• “High speed dubbing” is not available between the HDD and DVD-R/RW recorded on other equipment.
• Dubbing procedures to DVD-R/RW always comply with “Aspect ratio(Video mode)” setting (
• Some parts in DVD-R/RW may be divided if dubbed.
page 162).
• If you record a title directly onto a DVD-R/RW in the DVD-Video mode on this recorder and execute “High speed dubbing” on
the title to the HDD, the recorder may display a message to initialize the HDD. In this case, delete the title or execute “All
HDD titles delete” (
page 163).
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cancelling selection of an item
1) Press to select an item then press
QUICK MENU.
/
/
/
The Quick Menu appears.
e.g.
EDIT
HDD
Title
Original
Quick Menu
Cancel selected title
Preview
Preview all selected items
Title information
Clear all selected items
Auto power off
Exit
Dubbing Media: DVD
Start
Capacity
2) Press
/
to select “Cancel selected title” (or
“All clear” for cancelling selection of multiple
items at a time).
3) Press ENTER.
Changing the position of an item
Follow the procedure above to cancel selection of the
item, then repeat steps 4 to 6 on
page 109 to
insert the item into its desired location.
Cancelling during dubbing
Press QUICK MENU to display the Quick Menu.
Press
/
to select “Cancel dubbing”, then press
ENTER.
Note
• This procedure copies items according to their order
indicated in the lower area. Therefore, there may be a case
that some items have already been copied at the time you
cancel dubbing.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Rate conversion dubbing
(Dubbing at a modified bit rate)
You can reduce the recorded picture or sound rate when copying. This procedure enables content originally
recorded onto the HDD at high rate setting to be dubbed onto a DVD-RAM disc at a reduced bit rate.
Use the Rate conversion dubbing when
• you recorded a lengthy content on the HDD using the manual high rate, and it is too large to dub in the DVD-RAM disc.
• you recorded a title with setting the “DVD compatible mode” (
page 162) to “Off”, and you want to make a
DVD-R/RW disc for that title, or you used another recorder to record a title in a DVD-RAM disc, and you want to
create a DVD-R/RW disc for that title (Set “DVD compatible mode” to “On (Mode I)” or “On (Mode)” then execute this
procedure).
The Rate conversion dubbing can be performed in two different ways: part by part or multiple parts in one time. (To
dub multiple parts in one time, the same rate is applied to all parts.You cannot set different rate to each part.)
Preparation
• Press the HDD or DVD button to select a disc containing the parts that you want to dub.
Rate conversion dubbing for part by part
Perform steps 1 and 2 on
page 106.
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
1
2
DVD
MENU
RETURN
Press QUICK MENU.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
The Quick Menu appears.
EASY
NAVI
QUICK MENU
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press
/
to select “Rate conversion
ENTER
dubbing”, then press ENTER.
3
The “CONTENT MENU Rate conversion dubbing”
appears.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
ENTER
e.g.
CONTENT
Rate conversion dubbing
MENU
QUICK MENU
(0:52:40)
Original
Copy
:
:
2004/06/11 20 00 Ch
4
(Saves Original)
Same Disc
(Saves Original)
Original
LP
Copy
D/M2
2.0
Result
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
D/M2
LP
2.0
Select Quick Menu to modify bitrate.
Higher bitrate for copied media will not improve quality.
All chapter marks will be deleted.
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
/
to select “Copy” or “Same Disc”.
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
4
5
DVD
MENU
RETURN
Copy:
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
After the operation is completed, a specified part will
remain on the disc where it was previously located.
Same Disc:
A part will be copied to the same disc and the copied
part will become another title.
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Confirm picture and sound rates.
To make changes, follow the procedure below.
1) Press the QUICK MENU button to display the Quick
Menu.
QUICK MENU
ENTER
e.g.
CON
ing
ME
Quick Menu
(0:52:40)
Original
Copy
2
AV recordquality
Auto rate selection
Auto power off
Exit
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
ENTER
(Saves Original)
QUICK MENU
Same Disc
(Saves Original)
2) Press the
/
buttons to select an item then press
the ENTER button.
AV record quality:
The current settings you have made (
page 161) are
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
listed. Press the ADJUST (
desired setting.
Auto rate selection:
The recorder automatically selects the highest possible
rate, calculating from current unoccupied volume on the
disc. (This operation does not insure full recording of any
length program or whole use of unoccupied volume.)
/
) button to select a
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Press ENTER.
6
TIME BAR
Copying starts.
QUICK MENU
To confirm the job progress, press the TIME BAR button
to display the time bar. (The time bar cannot be copied.)
When copying is completed, the buzzer sounds and the
current broadcast picture appears.
ENTER
Pictures and sounds displayed during copying are for
monitoring purposes only. Recorded picture quality may
vary.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Rate conversion dubbing (Dubbing at a modified bit rate) (Continued)
Rate conversion dubbing for multiple parts
During playback or stop, press EDIT MENU.
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
1
2
DVD
MENU
RETURN
The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
EDIT MENU
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press
/
to select “Rate Conv. Items”, then
press ENTER.
The “EDIT MENU Rate Conv. Items” appears.
ENTER
e.g.
EDIT Rate Conv. Items
HDD
Title
MENU
Original
ENTER
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
Source will be Title.
Dubbing Media: DVD
QUICK MENU
Collect parts to be dubbed, using steps 4 to 6
on page 109.
3
4
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
Each of the collected parts is recorded on the destination media
as a title.
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
You can cancel selection of an individual part.
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
1) Press the
QUICK MENU button.
The Quick Menu appears.
/
/
/
buttons to select an item then press the
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
2) Press the
/
buttons to select “Cancel selected title” (or “All
clear” for cancelling selection of multiple items at a time).
3) Press the ENTER button.
TIME BAR
Check the rate for picture and sound quality.
QUICK MENU
To change the setting, perform the following steps.
1) Press the QUICK MENU button to display the Quick Menu.
2) Press the
/
buttons to select “AV record quality” and press
the ENTER button.
3) Press the ADJUST (
/
) button to select the setting
number and press the ENTER button.
When “Copy” on the bottom shows “X”, the selected parts are
beyond the disc capacity. Change the rate for picture and sound
quality or reduce parts to dub.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
/
to select “Start”, and select “Yes”,
then press ENTER.
5
Copying starts.
To confirm the job progress, press the TIME BAR button
to display the time bar. (The time bar cannot be copied.)
When copying is completed, the buzzer sounds and the
current broadcast picture appears.
ENTER
Pictures and sounds displayed during copying are for
monitoring purposes only. Recorded picture quality may
vary.
Cancelling dubbing during rate conversion
dubbing
• When you record a NICAM programme and play it back,
the left and right channels are output at the same time.
Select the sound by pressing the AUDIO button.
1) Press QUICK MENU.
• When you set “DVD compatible mode” to “On (Mode I)” or
2) Press
/
to select “Cancel dubbing”.
“On (Mode II)” (
page 162), only a selected sound (the
left and right channels) of the NICAM programme is
recorded. (Stereo broadcasting is recorded as stereo).
• If you perform the Rate conversion dubbing for a Playlist,
containing a chapter that is the beginning of the Original
title at recording, one frame at the beginning will be
removed.
3) Press ENTER.
Note
• A portion of content from the start of recording to the
moment you cancel dubbing will be copied.
• During Rate conversion dubbing, P in P function (
page 69), zoom function (
page 72), “Custom picture
Turning off the power automatically after
dubbing
select” (
page 157) and “Play DNR” (
page 158)
are disabled.
• Rate conversion dubbing to DVD-R/RW selects aspect
ratio according to the first title of dubbed items.
• Each part, when selected, shows its name at the bottom
of the menu for about 2 seconds.
1) During dubbing, press QUICK MENU.
2) Press
/
to select “Auto power off”.
3) Press ENTER.
Notes
• Unlike High speed dubbing, Rate conversion dubbing may
cause slight deterioration in picture and sound quality of
recorded content. The time required for dubbing is about
the same as the playback time of the content.
• Quality will not be improved even if you select a rate higher
than original content.
• Chapter marks are not copied.
• Rate conversion dubbing to the same DVD-RAM/R/RW
disc is not possible.
• The recorder automatically inserts a black picture for a
moment before and after the new title produced by this
recording process.
• You cannot use the Rate conversion dubbing for copying
from a DVD-RAM disc to another DVD-RAM disc.
• During Rate conversion dubbing, the relay recording
function (
page 48) is disabled even if “Relay recording”
(
page 162) is set to “On”.
• During Rate conversion dubbing, switching the audio
channel is not possible.
• Audio processed under the Rate conversion dubbing is
recorded in stereo.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Line-U dubbing
(Recording pictures while viewing them)
You can record the picture being played back in either disc, or to the other disc, if the content is not
copy-protected. This procedure can be used also to copy contents of a DVD-R/RW you created (
122), back to the HDD.
page
Preparation
• Make sure that the destination disc has adequate available remaining space.
• When you want to copy to the HDD, load a disc you want to play.
Example: To copy from a DVD-RAM disc to the HDD
Press INPUT SELECT or CHANNEL repeatedly
to select “LineU.”
OPEN/CLOSE
1
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
A black screen appears.
INPUT SELECT
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
Line U
Stereo
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
CHANNEL
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press HDD.
2
ENTER
HDD
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
Press REC.
QUICK MENU
3
Recording starts.
REC
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
Press DVD.
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
4
5
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
DVD
Start playing.
PLAY
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When playback of content you want to copy is
finished, press STOP.
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
6
DVD
MENU
RETURN
Playing stops, and a black screen returns.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
STOP
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press HDD.
7
8
ENTER
HDD
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
Press STOP.
QUICK MENU
Recording stops.
STOP
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
ZOOM
P in P
Notes
• The following combinations of a source and a destination disc are possible.
HDD to HDD, HDD to DVD-RAM, HDD to DVD-R/RW, DVD-RAM to HDD, DVD-R/RW to HDD
• A title dubbed by this procedure has black pictures at both the beginning and the end of the title. Therefore thumbnails in the
“CONTENT MENU” may be black. If you change the thumbnail, see
page 100.
• You can record still pictures and slow pictures during playback.
• Contents of DVD VIDEO, VIDEO CD, and audio CD cannot be recorded with Line-U dubbing.
• Line-U dubbing may cause slight deterioration in picture and sound quality of contents.
• Screen menus such as “CONTENT MENU” or “REC MENU” cannot be recorded with Line-U dubbing.
• “Line-U dubbing” cannot be set as programme recording.
• When doing this procedure, programme recording must not be initiated. If you display the “REC MENU”, playback is
automatically cancelled.
• When setting the input to “Line-U”, audio output is set to stereo automatically.You cannot switch the audio channel. During
Line-U dubbing, you can change the audio output.
• Accompanying audio content to be recorded with Line-U dubbing is always in stereo.
• During Line-U dubbing, the virtual surround function (
• Even if “Relay recording” is set to “On” ( page 162), the relay recording function is disabled during Line-U dubbing.
• For Line-U dubbing, a scene permitting copy-once cannot be copied.
• During Line-U dubbing, P in P function ( page 69), zoom function (
and “Play DNR” ( page 158) are disabled.
page 158) is disabled.
page 72), “Custom picture select” (
page 157)
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Deleting selected items
(Deleting multiple specified parts)
This section explains how to simultaneously delete unnecessary titles and chapters.
On a finalized DVD-R/RW disc, this feature is not possible.
Preparation
• Press the HDD or DVD button to select a disc that contains titles or chapters you want to delete.
During playback or stop, press EDIT MENU.
OPEN/CLOSE
1
DVD
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
EDIT MENU
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press
/
to select “Del Selected Items”.
2
e.g.
ENTER
EDITMain Menu
HDD
MENU
Source
DV Recording
Chapter Editing
Del Selected Items
ENTER
Several titles or unnecessary chapters
in several titles can bedeleted at one
time.
Edit Functions
Playlist Editing
Title
1
Title
1
Title
1
2
2
3
3
2
2
3
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
Dub Selected Items
Rate Conv. Items
Combine ORG Title
DVD-Video Creation
DVD-Video Finalizing
Del Selected Items
1
2
1
3
QUICK MENU
Press ENTER.
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
3
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
The “EDIT MENU Del Selected Items” appears.
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
e.g.
EDIT Del Selected Items
HDD
Title
MENU
Original
ENTER
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Object
HDD/DVD
Start
A
Thumbnails of the parts in the disc are displayed in the
upper area.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Following steps 4 to 6 on
page 109,
assemble the items to delete.
4
5
ENTER
Press repeatedly to select “Start”, then
press ENTER.
The recorder begins the deletion process.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
To cancel deleting, press the
/
buttons to select
“No”, then press the ENTER button.
ENTER
QUICK MENU
When the process is finished, the “EDIT MENU Main
Menu” returns.
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
QUICK MENU
PROGRESSIVE
Notes
• To confirm the first and last scenes of an item, first select an item then press the QUICK MENU button. Press the
/
buttons to select “Preview” (or “Title information”) then press the ENTER button. This is available only on contents recorded
in the HDD or DVD-RAM discs.
• Titles and chapters show their names for about 2 seconds at the bottom of the screen when they are selected.
• On a DVD-RW disc, deleting can restore the disc space only by deleting the last recorded title.
• Deleting cannot be cancelled once started. Be careful when executing the deletion process.
• If you select a title for the part to be removed, you cannot select chapters in that title.
• Chapters in DVD-R/RW discs cannot be selected to delete.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
HDD
DVD-RAM
Combine Original titles
(Combine two titles into one)
Use this feature to combine two titles into one. The second title is deleted as the second title is added to
the end of the first title.
Preparation
• Press the HDD or DVD button to select a disc that contains titles or chapters you want to merge.
During playback or stop, press EDIT MENU.
OPEN/CLOSE
1
DVD
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
EDIT MENU
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press
/
to select “Combine ORG Title”,
then press ENTER.
2
The “EDIT MENU Combine ORG Title” display appears.
ENTER
e.g.
EDIT Combine ORG Title
HDD
Title
ENTER
MENU
Original
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
QUICK MENU
Object :HDD
For source, only 2 titles (original)
can e selected. After combined,
the second title is included into the
first one.
Start combining
Title:
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
Press
/
to select the first title to merge.
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
3
4
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
Press the PICTURE SEARCH button to move to the
previous or next page.
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
ENTER
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Press ENTER.
PICTURE SEARCH
HDD/DVD
The cursor appears in the lower area of the screen (the
title to merge to).
ENTER
Object :HDD
For source, only 2 titles (original)
can e selected. After combined,
the second title is included into the
first one.
Cursor
Start combining
Title:
A
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
part and press ENTER.
/
to select the location to put the
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
5
DVD
MENU
RETURN
It is fixed at the left side at the beginning. Press the
ENTER button. The selected part moved into the
location of the cursor.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
e.g.
EDIT Combine ORG Title
EASY
NAVI
HDD
Title
MENU
Original
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Object :HDD
For source, only 2 titles (original)
can e selected. After combined,
the second title is included into the
first one.
ENTER
Start combining
Title:
Perform steps 3 to 5 and select the second
title.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
6
7
You cannot select the same title.
QUICK MENU
To cancel the registered part:
1) Select the part that you want to cancel, and press the QUICK
MENU button to display the Quick Menu.
2) Press the
/
buttons to select “Cancel selected title” (or
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
“Clear all selected items” for cancelling the selection of
multiple items at a time).
3) Press the ENTER button.
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
Press
/
to select “Start combining”and
press ENTER, then select “Yes” and press
ENTER.
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
The combining process starts.
QUICK MENU
ENTER
Notes
• You cannot stop the combining process after it has started.
• You cannot combine titles if their length will exceed 8 hours.
• You cannot combine a protected title or a title containing still pictures.
• The title name of the first title is given to the title after combining.
• The second title is combined into the first title, maintaining the chapter divisions and chapter names.
• Titles and chapters show their names for about 2 seconds at the bottom of the screen when they are selected.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
DVD-RW DVD-R
Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW
Content stored on the HDD of the recorder can be edited and copied to a DVD-R, a popular media for
distribution, and played on a compatible DVD video player. Rewriteable DVD-RW are also available.
Caution
•
Beforehand confirm the content in the disc.
If you use a DVD-R, prepare a new one. This DVD-Video creation procedure is possible only once per disc on
this recorder. Once you have copied to a DVD-R, you cannot redo it, add, delete, or correct the copied contents
in the disc. If you start copying then cancel the job, you cannot re-use the DVD-R.
If you use a DVD-RW, be sure to confirm contents in it. This procedure overwrites a whole disc, and all contents
in a DVD-RW will be lost. If you want to add contents to a DVD-RW, do not use this procedure. Record directly
or make a dubbing to the DVD-RW, then execute the finalization (
page 132). This procedure includes the
finalizing process, and you will not be able to add, delete, or correct contents to a DVD-RW later, as it will have
been finalized. If a finalized DVD-RW has remaining space, you can add contents there if you cancel the
finalizing process of the DVD-RW (
page 135).
•
Do not start copying to a DVD-R/RW when a programmed recording is scheduled to begin shortly.
Copying entirely to a DVD-R/RW will take 1 hour and a half (variable depending on the contents). (This does not
include time for “Writing Test”. This option requires more time. Actual time for “Writing Test” depends on the
contents to test, and may be longer than the playing time of the contents if the disc contains too little contents or
too many quality and picture settings, etc.)
If a start time of a programmed recording comes during this procedure, the recording is made onto the HDD.
However, while making a menu theme, the recording is not executed. Also, programmed recordings to DVD
media with “Off” setting of “Relay recording” (
page 162) are not executed.
If a programmed recording starts during this procedure, you cannot continue to make one more discs after
completion of the first disc.
•
Ensure the compatibility of a disc.
Refer to the
page 9.
*
Discs made by this procedure will comply with the DVD-Video standard. However, it is not guaranteed to play
properly on all DVD video players (including TOSHIBA products).
Depending on the disc, there may be a difference of data capacity between DVD-R and DVD-RW. It may be
possible that contents you have just recorded onto a DVD-R cannot be recorded onto a DVD-RW. (DVD-RW
capacity may be smaller.)
•
Follow the instructions on handling of the disc.
Preparation
• Record contents which you want to copy to DVD-R/RW to make DVD-Video, to the HDD with the following settings:
- “DVD compatible mode” (
page 162): “On (Mode I)” or “On (Mode II)”.
- Bit rate of 4.0 or more.
• Load a new DVD-R or a DVD-RW. (Follow the instructions on handling of the disc.)
• Press the HDD button to select the HDD mode.
Notes
• If you recorded a title while setting “DVD compatible mode” (
page 162) to “Off” or you used another recorder to record a
title in a DVD-RAM disc, and you want to copy such a title to a DVD-R/RW to create a DVD-Video, first set “DVD compatible
mode” to “On (Mode I)” or “On (Mode II)” then execute the procedure of “Rate conversion dubbing (
page 112).
• Depending on the disc, DVD-R 4X speed compatibility may be disabled.
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press EDIT MENU.
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
1
2
DVD
MENU
RETURN
The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
EDIT MENU
e.g.
EDITMain Menu
HDD
MENU
Source
Chapter Editing
Chapters can be divided on frame
basis. Chapters can be merged and
assigned names.
DV Recording
Chapter Editing
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
Edit Functions
Playlist Editing
Title
REC MENU EDIT MENU
1
Merge
Divide
Dub Selected Items
Rate Conv. Items
Combine ORG Title
DVD-Video Creation
DVD-Video Finalizing
Del Selected Items
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
1
2
3
4
5
ENTER
Press
/
to select “DVD-Video Creation”,
then press ENTER.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
The “EDIT MENU DVD-Video Create (Selected Items)”
appears.
ENTER
e.g.
QUICK MENU
DVD-Video Create
EDIT
HDD
Sourece:Title
MENU (Selected Items)
Original
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
Creating Media: DVD
Next
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
Capacity
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
A
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
Thumbnails of titles on the HDD are displayed in the
upper area.
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Press
/
/
/
to select a part (a title or
chapter) to copy to the DVD-R/RW.
3
• To go to the preceding or following page, press the
PICTURE SEARCH button.
PICTURE SEARCH
ENTER
• To select a chapter, first select the title that contains
the chapter you want, then press the
To return to the title display, press the
button.
button again.
e.g.
DVD-Video Create
EDIT
HDD
Sourece:Title
MENU (Selected Items)
Original
Creating Media: DVD
Next
Capacity
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Confined)
Press ENTER.
OPEN/CLOSE
4
DVD
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
A cursor appears in the lower area (destination media).
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
e.g.
DVD-Video Create
EDIT
HDD
Sourece:Title
MENU (Selected Items)
Original
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Creating Media: DVD
Next
Cursor
Capacity
B
A
ENTER
Press
/
to select a location to place the
selected part, then press ENTER.
5
6
If there are no parts in the lower area, leave the cursor
to the left and press the ENTER button.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
ENTER
The selected part is inserted into the location of the
cursor.
QUICK MENU
e.g.
DVD-Video Create
EDIT
HDD
Sourece:Title
MENU (Selected Items)
Original
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
Creating Media: DVD
Next
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
Capacity
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Repeat steps 3 to 5.
You can confirm the available volume of a DVD-R/RW on the bar
at the bottom of the menu.
QUICK MENU
Each of the assembled parts is recorded onto the destination
media as a title.
PICTURE SEARCH
• To cancel selection of a part, see
page 130.
• To change the title/chapter name or thumbnail before selection:
1) Select the part that you want to change, and press the QUICK
MENU button.
2) Press the
/
buttons to select “Edit title name” or “Modify
title thumbnail” to change the title, or “Edit chapter name” or
“Modify chapter thumbnail” to change the chapter, and press
the ENTER button.
3) Use the entry screen to change the title or chapter name.
To change a title thumbnail or a chapter thumbnail, see the
steps on
page 100.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
ENTER.
/
to select “Next”, then press
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
7
DVD
MENU
RETURN
A screen is displayed to select options.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
e.g.
EDITDVD Video Creation(Option Settings)
ENTER
MENU
Title+Chapter
Menu
Title
Title 1
Chapter
None
Menu Create
Start Play
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
After play one title
After play final title
Writing Test
Menu
Next Title
Title 1
REC MENU EDIT MENU
Menu
Stop
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
None
Parts Test
All Test
16:9 fixed
Original
4:3 fixed
Set aspect ratio
Return
Next
ENTER
Press
/
/
/
to set the items.
8
9
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
For the instruction of setting, see the description shown
at selection.
QUICK MENU
ENTER
• When you have selected “Parts Test” or “All Test” for
“Writing Test”, extra time is required for pre-writing
test. “All Test” requires more time than “Parts Test”.
If a DVD-RW is used, the recorder regards “All Test”
selection as “Parts Test” to execute the test.
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
If you select “None” for “Menu Create”:
The setting of “Start Play” and “After play one title” is
skipped automatically.
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
Press
ENTER.
/
to select “Next”, then press
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
A screen is displayed to confirm the information you are
going to write.
ENTER
e.g.
EDITDVD Video Creation(Disc Information)
MENU
Disc Name
Edit Name
Total title number
Total time
11
1 hour 24 min.
Return
Next
A
Press the button to select “Edit Name” and press the
ENTER button to go to the character entry screen. The
number of characters is limited for the disc name you can
enter.
If you selected “None” for “Menu Create” at step 8,
select “Writing” on the bottom right corner, and press the
ENTER button. Skip to step 14.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Confined)
Press to select “Next”, then press ENTER.
OPEN/CLOSE
10
DVD
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
A display of title menu selection appears if “Menu
Create” is set to “Tltle+Chapter” or “Title” at step 7.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
ENTER
To view your captured images (
next page.
page 129), go to the
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
e.g.
EDITDVD Video Creation (Title Menu Select)
1
/
2
REC MENU EDIT MENU
MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
M. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
Deep Blue
Olive
Sepia
Light Blue
MRSATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
R. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
ENTER
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
Orange
Cyber Green
A
Lavender
Cyber Red
If you press the
menu. To return, press the O button.
button, you can preview the selected
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
QUICK MENU
While displaying a preview screen of your captured
image, you can access the other menu to correct colour
(
page 129) by pressing the
button.
Press
press ENTER.
/
/
/
to select the menu, then
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
11
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
If you have set “Menu Create” to “Title+Chapter” or
“Chapter” at step 7, a screen is displayed to select a
chapter menu.
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
ENTER
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Press
/
/
/
to select the chapter menu.
12
The selected menu is set for all chapters.
You cannot set it for each chapter individually.
ENTER
If you press the
button, you can preview the selected
menu. To return, press the O button.
If you press the button to select “Return” while
previewing and press the ENTER button, you will return
to the preview of the title menu. To go back to the
chapter menu, press the
/
/
/
button to select a
number next to “Chapter Menu” on the bottom center.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press ENTER on the “EDIT MENU DVD Video
Creation (Chapter Menu Select)” display.
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
13
DVD
MENU
RETURN
A confirmation message is displayed.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press
/
to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
14
The current broadcast picture appears and dubbing
starts. The progress is displayed on the screen and in
the front panel display on the recorder.
ENTER
ENTER
When copying is completed, a finalizing process follows.
This enables the disc to be played on a DVD video
player.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
QUICK MENU
When the process is completed, a message “Create
another DVD-Video now?” appears (except when “Auto
power off” (see below) is set). If you select “Yes”, you
can make one more DVD-R/RW of the same content. If
you select “No”, you can complete creating the DVD-
Video.
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
• You can set the recorder to turn off automatically when
the job finishes.
1) During the job, press the QUICK MENU button.
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
2) Press the
/
buttons to select “Auto power off”.
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
3) Press the ENTER button.
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
QUICK MENU
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Confined)
Notes
Selecting the items displayed on the menu
• The number of titles that you can write on a DVD-R/RW is
limited (99 titles. Each title should have 99 chapters or
less). If you have a large number of titles or chapters, you
may not be able to write due to the limitation of the DVD
specifications. Also, even if the number of titles and
chapters is within the limit, you may not be able to write if
you have a large number of menu items.
You can hide items on the menu if necessary.
To hide a disc name
Leave “Disc Name” blank. Display the on-screen
keyboard and press the CLEAR button to delete
letters, then press the
button to save.
• Due to standard differences, the number of chapters and
their position may change slightly after DVD-Video
creation. (For chapters generated on the DVD-R/RW, the
same thumbnail for the Original chapter is displayed.)
• Due to standard limitation, DVD-R/RW may contain
unnecessary scenes after creation.
• If you select items of various types of video outputs, aspect
ratios or other properties, or if you select an item recorded
with different settings, they may be divided into titles. (For
titles generated on the DVD-R/RW, the same thumbnail for
the Original title is displayed).
• Content based on a complicated Playlist or composed of
too many items may not be copied properly.
• Copy-once permitted contents cannot be copied to a
DVD-R/RW, even if they are recorded onto the HDD while
“DVD compatible mode” is set to “On (Mode I)” or “On
To hide a page number
Leave “Disc Name” blank. Follow the above
method.
To hide a disc name and show a page number
Enter one more space in “Disc Name”.
To hide a title/chapter name
On the “CONTENT MENU” or a display of item
selection, select a title/chapter and display the
on-screen keyboard from the Quick Menu. Erase all
characters of the name.
You can hide a time also using the same manner.
• “Chapter 0001” . . . on the “CONTENT MENU”
means that the chapter is given no characters as
its name. Such a chapter does not show the
name on the menu.
(Mode II)” (
page 162).
• Content recorded on a recorder other than this recorder
(including TOSHIBA products) cannot be copied to a DVD-
R/RW using High speed dubbing. First set “DVD
compatible mode” to “On (Mode I)” or “On (Mode II)” and
record them onto the HDD. Then perform “Rate conversion
• A chapter menu shows the title name at the top
right corner. If you hide the title name, no
character appears in this area.
dubbing” (
page 112) to copy to the HDD.
To hide a title/chapter name and show a time
• When a content is recorded with manual rate 1.4 Mbps and
is including a 16:9 picture shape scene, the DVD creation
of the content may failure. In this case, set “Set aspect
ratio” to “4:3 fixed” on the menu “(Option Settings)”.
• Even if the title is recorded with “DVD compatible mode” set
to “On (Mode I)” or “On (Mode II)”, using a recorder other
than this may cause failure when recording to a DVD-R/RW.
• If the DVD-R creating fails to be completed, most of the
discs cannot be used again.
Enter one more space and save it as the title/
chapter name.
Note
• You cannot hide items other than above.
• If an error occurs while a DVD-Video is created, the error
code “ERR-**” (** indicates the error code) is shown in
the front panel display of the recorder. (
page 169) To
clear this display, press the DISPLAY button.
• There may be a difference between a specified thumbnail
of menu in the DVD-Video creation procedure and the one
on displayed in the “CONTENT MENU”.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a favorite scene as a menu
You can select favorite scenes from the recorded
contents and use them as menus of DVD-Video
To delete a captured image
Press to select an image to delete then
press QUICK MENU. Press to select “Delete
/
/
/
/
menu” then press ENTER. Follow the message to
Created (
page 126) DVD-R/RW.
operate.
1) During stop or playback, press CONTENT
MENU.
To delete all captured images, select “Delete all
menus”.
2) Press
/
/
/
to select a title which
contains a scene to use as menus.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
4) Press
/
to select “Save captured images”.
Selecting colour options on menus
5) Select a scene.
Several options are available: a translucent
background for better legibility, character colour and
cursor colour selections.
Locate a scene using the buttons such as PLAY,
SLOW, FRAME or PAUSE, etc.
1) At step 10 (
and select a captured image by
then press
The preview screen appears.
page 126), go to the next page
6) Press
ENTER.
/
to select “Loading” and press
/
/
/
,
.
e.g.
EDIT
HDD
Save captures images
2003/06/10 17:09 Ch:3
MENU
2) Press
.
Original
:
Aspect Ratio
4
3
:
:
:
Location 00 00 00 03F
Loading
A colour setting display appears.
Select back ground picture
e.g.
EDITDVD-Video Creation (color setting)
:
:
:
:
00 00 00
00 54 30
MENU
Title: 002 Chapter: 0004
On
Off
Back ground color
Color
D
White Black
0.5 0.7 0.9
D
Permeation Ratio
T001(00:00:23)
D
Character
color
1
2
3
4 5
6
7
8
9
10 1112
Note
• You cannot capture copy-protected contents.
• The maximum number of pictures which can be saved
Set up the disc name, the
title name or page numer
on upper side of the screen,
OR the letter color of the
title name, the chapter
name and the time beside
the thumbnail.
Selecting
color
1
1
2
2
3
3
4 5
4 5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10 1112
10 1112
Selected
color
varies depending on the data size.
3) Set each item by
/
/
/
, referring to the
To name a captured image
guidance on the right half of the display, finally
press to exit.
The preview screen returns.
Press
/
/
/
to select an image to name then
to select “Enter
press QUICK MENU. Press
/
DVD-Video menu name” then press ENTER.
e.g.
EDIT
HDD
M
Quick Menu
3/06/10 17:09 Ch:3
Enter DVD-Video menu name
Delete name
Delete all menus
Exit
Original
:
Aspect Ratio
4
3
:
:
:
ation 00 00 00 03F
t back ground picture
Loading
:
:
:
:
00 00 00
00 54 30
Title: 002 Chapter: 0004
T001(00:00:23)
The on-screen keyboard appears.
Enter a name.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Confined)
Cancelling selection of an item
1) Press to select an item then press
QUICK MENU.
To improve legibility of characters on menus
Press
/
/
/
to set “Back ground color” to
/
/
/
“On”. Then select “Color” (“White” or “Black”)
according to the menu’s tone, and set “Permeation
Ratio”, which sets how translucent the selected
Back ground color is. The higher the ratio, the Back
ground color will be more translucent but the lower
legibility of characters.
The Quick Menu appears.
e.g.
DVD-Video Create
EDIT
HDD
Sourece:Title
Quick Menu
Original
Cancel selected title
Preview
Preview all selected items
Title information
Clear all selected items
Auto power off
To change the character colour
Exit
Creating Media: DVD
Next
Press
/
/
/
to select from 12 colours. When
you select “White” back ground colour, dark colour
should be a better choice.
Capacity
To change the cursor colour
“Selecting Color” is a colour for moving cursor.
“Selected Color” is one for press of the ENTER
button.
2) Press
/
to select “Cancel selected title” (or
“Clear all selected items” for cancelling
selection of all items at a time).
3) Press ENTER.
The selected item disappears.
To preview your selections
Press the O button to return to the preview screen.
If you correct your selections, repeat steps 2) and
3) (
page 129).
Changing the location of an item
Follow the procedure above to cancel selection of the
item, then repeat steps 3 to 5 to re-insert the item in a
desired location (
page 123, 124).
Confirming the content in the lower area
Select an item and press QUICK MENU. Then press
/
to select “Preview” and press ENTER.
Notes
• Each time an item is selected, its name appears at the
bottom of the screen.
• You can also confirm the content by selecting “Title
information” from the Quick Menu.
Cancelling dubbing process
Press QUICK MENU to display the Quick Menu.
Press
/
to select “Stop creating DVD video”,
then press ENTER.
Notes
• To cancel creating a DVD-R will render the loaded DVD-R
useless.
• Cancelling is not always possible.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a message appears while selecting a part
You may receive a message, such as “Selection of
Writing Test in the next option setting is recommended
to check whether Aspect Ratio coexists”. If a copy-
prohibited content is included, or if the aspect ratio is
changed meanwhile, cancel the selection. If you are
not sure, select “Writing Test” (“Parts Test” or “All Test”).
Note
• Depending on selection or condition of items, copying may
result in failure. If a message appears, be sure to, prior to
step 7, press the QUICK MENU button. Then press the
/
buttons to select “Cancel selected title”, and press
the ENTER button. If you do not do this and continue the
copying process, an error may occur and the disc will be
rendered useless.
Playing a created DVD-Video
You can play the DVD-R/RW in the same manner as you
would play a DVD video disc.
See
page 60.
If you want to correct the contents of a DVD-RW
after the DVD-Video creation procedure
Cancel the finalization of the DVD-RW (
page 135).
It is possible only on DVD-RW recorded on this
recorder.
After cancelling, you can delete titles. However, you
cannot re-use the whole disc, since only the last title
can restore the disc space.
If you want to delete all contents of a DVD-RW
after the DVD-Video creation procedure
Load the DVD-RW into the recorder and initialize it,
then execute the procedure of DVD-Video creation
(
page 122).
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
DVD-RW DVD-R
DVD-Video finalizing process
The recorder processes recorded data in a DVD-R/RW disc so that it can be played on other compatible
devices.
Important
• You cannot rewrite data onto a disc after you execute the DVD-Video finalizing process. However, the disabled rewritability of
a DVD-RW disc can be restored by cancelling the process of the disc (
DVD-Video finalizing process is not available.
page 135). On DVD-R discs, cancelling of the
• Cancelling of the DVD-Video finalizing process is available only on DVD-RW recorded or copied contents on this recorder.
Preparation
• Press the DVD button to select the DVD mode.
• Load a DVD-R/RW disc you want to execute the finalizing process.
During playback or stop, press EDIT MENU.
OPEN/CLOSE
1
DVD
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
EDIT MENU
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press
/
to select “DVD-Video Finalizing”.
2
e.g.
EDITMain Menu
DVD-R
MENU
Source
ENTER
DV Recording
Chapter Editing
DVD-Video Finalizing
ENTER
Used to crete compatibility between
the recorded DVD-R/-RW and
DVD Players. Also used for setting up
“menu picture”, etc.
Edit Functions
Playlist Editing
Title
1
Title
1
Title
1
2
3
2
2
3
Dub Selected Items
Rate Conv. Items
Combine ORG Title
DVD-Video Creation
DVD-Video Finalizing
Del Selected Items
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
Finalize
2
Menu
1
2
3
2
1
1
3
QUICK MENU
Press ENTER.
3
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
A display of option settings appears.
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
e.g.
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
EDITDVD-Video Finalize(Option Settings)
ENTER
MENU
Title+Chapter
Menu
Title
Title 1
Chapter
None
Menu Create
Start Play
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
After play one title
After play final title
Writing Test
Menu
Next Title
Title 1
Menu
Stop
None
Parts Test
All Test
16:9 fixed
Original
4:3 fixed
Set aspect ratio
Return
Next
A
B
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
/
/
/
to select.
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
4
5
DVD
MENU
RETURN
As you select each item, its function is explained.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
When “Menu Create” is set to “None”:
“Start play” and “After play one title” are automatically
omitted.
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press
ENTER.
/
to select “Next”, then press
Information on data to be processed appears.
e.g.
EDITDVD-Video Finalize(Disc Information)
ENTER
MENU
Disc Name
ENTER
Edit Name
Total title number
Total time
11
1 hour 24 min.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
QUICK MENU
Return
Next
A
If you press the button to select “Edit Name” then
press the ENTER button, a keyboard appears so that
you can enter a title name.
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
When “Menu Create” is set to “None”:
Select “Writing” at the right bottom by the
buttons and press the ENTER button. Skip to step 10.
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
/
/
/
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
Press to select “Next”, then press ENTER.
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
6
When “Menu Create” is set to “Title+Chapter” or “Title”,
a display of title menu selection appears.
ENTER
To view your captured images (
next page.
page 129), go to the
e.g.
EDITDVD-Video Finalize (Title Menu Select)
1
/
2
MENU
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
R. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
D
D
D
O
O
O
N
OT
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
L
E
AV
E
E
E
H
H
H
E
E
E
R
R
R
E
E
E
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
N
OT
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
L
E
AV
Deep Blue
Olive
Sepia
Light Blue
MSATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
MRSATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
D
O
N
O
T
D
O
N
O
T
D
O
N
O
T
D
O
N
O
T
D
O
N
O
T
D
O
N
O
T
D
O
N
O
T
D
O
N
O
T
If you press the
button, you can preview the selected
menu. To return, press the O button.
While displaying a preview screen of your captured
image, you can access the other menu to correct colour
(
page 129) by pressing the
button.
(Continued)
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
DVD-Video finalize process (Continued)
Press
press ENTER.
/
/
/
to select the title menu, then
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
7
8
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
A display of chapter menu selection appears if “Menu
Create” is set to “Title+Chapter” or “Chapter” at step 3.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press
/
/
/
to select the chapter menu.
A selected menu is applied to all chapters.You cannot
allocate a menu to each chapter.
ENTER
ENTER
If you press the
button, you can preview the selected
menu. To return, press the O button.
If you press the button during preview, to select
“Return” then press the ENTER button, you can go to
the preview of the selected title menu. To return to the
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
QUICK MENU
preview of chapter menu, press the
/
/
/
buttons
to select a number next to “Chapter Menu” then press
the ENTER button.
Press ENTER on the “EDIT MENU DVD-Video
Finalize (Chapter Menu Select)” display, and
select “Yes” by / , then press ENTER.
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
9
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
A message appears to ask you if you want the power to
turn off automatically or not when the process is
completed.
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
ENTER
Press
ENTER.
/
to select “Yes” or “No”, then press
QUICK MENU
10
A message disappears and the finalize process starts.
The progress is displayed on the screen and in the front
panel display on the recorder.
ENTER
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes
• DVD-R/RW discs recorded on this recorder may not be
recognized on other devices unless you execute DVD-
Video finalizing process to them.
• You can record onto a DVD-R disc additionally to the limit
of the disc capacity, unless you execute the DVD-Video
finalizing process to it. Deleting of recorded titles is also
possible, however, the disc space cannot be restored.
• You can record additional content onto a DVD-RW disc
additionally to the limit of the disc capacity unless you
execute the DVD-Video finalizing process to it. Deleting of
recorded titles is also possible, however, the disc space
can be restored only by the volume of the title last
recorded.
• On DVD-RW discs, it is possible to cancel the DVD-Video
finalizing process or to initialize for a new use.
• If a start time of a programmed recording comes during
finalizing process, the recording is made onto the HDD.
However, while making a menu, the recording is not
executed. Also, when “Relay recording” is set to “Off” the
recording will not start.
DVD-RW
To cancel the finalize process
You can cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process
executed to a DVD-RW disc so that the disc can be
recordable again.
1) During stop, press QUICK MENU.
A quick menu appears.
2) Press
/
to select “Disc management” then
press ENTER.
3) Press
/
to select “Cancel finalization” then
press ENTER.
4) Read the message, and press
/
to select
“Yes”, then press ENTER.
The process starts.
Notes
• While the recorder is ready to start a programmed
recording, you cannot cancel the DVD-Video finalizing
process.
• You cannot cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process
executed on a DVD-RW disc recorded on other device.
• You cannot cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process
executed on a DVD-RW disc if the disc is protected.
• Cancelling the DVD-Video finalizing process may shift the
thumbnails of titles/chapters.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
DV recording
(Recording from a digital video camera)
You can connect a DV format digital video camera to the DV terminal to record from it.
Preparation
• Press the HDD or DVD button to select a recording media.
• Connect a DV format digital video camera to the DV terminal on the front panel.
DV terminal
During playback or stop, press EDIT MENU.
OPEN/CLOSE
1
DVD
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
EDIT MENU
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press
/
to select “DV Recording”.
2
e.g.
EDITMain Menu
HDD
MENU
Source
DV Recording
Chapter Editing
DV Recording
When using DV terminal, it is used for
setting up Auto Chapter Creation and
AV Record Quality.
ENTER
ENTER
Edit Functions
Playlist Editing
DV Original Picture
Dub Selected Items
Rate Conv. Items
Combine ORG Title
DVD-Video Creation
DVD-Video Finalizing
Del Selected Items
Recording
Saved Title
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
1
2
3
4
5
QUICK MENU
Press ENTER.
3
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
The “EDIT MENU DV Recording (Option Setting)”
appears.
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
ENTER
e.g.
EDITDV Recording (Option Setting)
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
MENU
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
Off
By Date
By Scene
DV Chapter Create
DVD-Video:CHP Create
DV Audio Input
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Off
5min. 10min. 15min. 20min.
Stereo1(L2+R2)
Stereo2(L2+R2)
AV Record Quality
Change
Next
4.6
D/M1
SP
HDD/DVD
This display will also appear when a DV format digital
video camera connected to the DV terminal is turned on
.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
/
/
/
to make the settings.
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU
4
5
DVD
MENU
RETURN
As you select each item, an explanation is provided.
To change the picture and sound rates:
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
1) Press the
/
buttons to select “Change” then press
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
the ENTER button.
EASY
NAVI
2) On the “AV record quality” display, press the ADJUST
button to select a setting number.
3) Press the ENTER button.
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press
ENTER.
/
/
/
to select “Next”, then press
ENTER
Details on the recording appears.
e.g.
EDIT DV Recording
ENTER
Equipment with DV Terminal
MENU
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
“Play” and then “Pause” with the connected equipment to DV.
Manufacturer
-------------------
Equipement -------------------
Playback Time
:
:
:
–– –– –– ––F
QUICK MENU
Recording Media : DVD
Rec
Rec
Stop(Save)
:
:
–– –– ––
Playback Time
:
:
Remaining space
AV Record Quality
DV Chapter Create
–– –– ––
SP 4.6
Off
D/M1
Full Display
End Return
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
Play the connected DV format digital video
camera and pause the play at a desired scene.
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
6
7
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Press
/
/
/
to select “Rec”, then press
ENTER.
Recording starts.
ADJUST
ENTER
To pause the recording, select “Pause” by the
/
/
/
buttons then press the ENTER button.
To stop the recording, select “Stop (Save)” by the
buttons then press the ENTER button.
/
/
/
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
DV Recording (Recording from a digital video camera) (Continued)
Notes
• The DV terminal of this recorder supports only input from a
DV format digital video camera. It cannot output to a
connected device. Some models of DV format digital video
cameras may be not compatible.
• At step 5, you can enlarge the video image by selecting
“Full Display”, then pressing the ENTER button.
• If “DV Chapter Create” is set to “Off” and you record onto a
DVD-R/RW disc, chapters are automatically made
according to the “DVD-Video:CHP create” setting
(
page 162). The number of chapters has the limit.
Chapters are divided with a margin of about 0.5 second or
less according to the DVD-Video standard.
• DV recording does not start in the following cases:
- While recording or in the time slip mode.
- While operating a “REC MENU”, “CONTENT MENU” or
“LIBRARY MENU”.
- If the recorder’s clock is not set yet.
- Within 5 minutes before a programmed recording starts, or
during a programmed recording.
• If a DV recording overlaps with a programmed recording,
the DV recording will stop 5 minutes before the
programmed recording starts, and the programmed
recording will be executed.
• DV recording does not work if the DV terminal is connected
equipment other than DV format digital video camera, such
as a PC.
• Depending on the connected DV format digital video
camera, the display at step 5 may not show “Manufacturer”
or “Equipment”.
• If the DV terminal is connected to more than one DV format
digital video camera, DV recording may not work properly.
For proper functioning of DV recording, connect only one
device to the DV terminal.
• DV recording is not compatible with Relay recording.
• Do not keep the DV terminal connected unless you record
from a DV format digital video camera, as it may give
influence on the recorder if operated.
• If you leave the “EDIT MENU DV Recording” unoperated
for about 15 minutes, it switches to the full mode if “Screen
protector” (
page 159) is set to “On.”
• When you want to record both stereo 1 and stereo 2
sounds from a DV format digital video camera, additionally
make a connection to the audio input jacks on this recorder
using cables such as audio/video cables supplied with the
DV format digital video camera. (
page 37)
• If a DV format digital video camera is not recognized, pull
out the plug and connect it again.
• Some models of DV format digital video cameras may
support a different compression format. From such
equipment, recording is not possible.
• Depending on the models of DV format digital video
cameras, recording may not work properly or some
functions may be disabled.
• On an input source from a DV tape which is partly recorded
over, chapters may not made properly.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Library
To facilitate your collecting.
Using Library data
Searching for a desired title
Viewing the Library data
Checking remaining space
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Library
HDD
DVD-RAM
Using Library data
The recorder has a “Library Management” database which memorizes various properties of recordings
made on this recorder, including date, media, title, genre, etc. Using this database, you can search for
desired or available discs.
You can utilize Library data as follows.
• To search for a DVD-RAM disc that contains a desired title.
• To check or change information of title or disc.
• To check the remaining space of a DVD-RAM disc.
Basic operation of the Library system
Press LIBRARY.
OPEN/CLOSE
1
DVD
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
The “LIBRARY MENU Title Summary (All Titles)”
appears.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
LIBRARY
e.g.
LIBRARY
1
/
2
6/22 (Tu)
14:49
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
MENU Title Summary (All Titles)
No.
Date
Day
Time
CH Genre
Title Name
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
:
:
2004/ 6/20 Su
19 00
5
4
3
3
2004/06/20 19 00 Ch:5
HDD
REC MENU EDIT MENU
:
:
2004/ 6/19 Sa
2004/ 6/18 Fr
2004/ 6/17 Th
2004/06/19 23 00 Ch:4
23 00
HDD
HDD
HDD
:
:
19 00
2004/06/18 19 00 Ch:3
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
:
:
2004/06/17 21 00 Ch:3
21 00
Press QUICK MENU.
2
3
ENTER
A Quick Menu appears.
QUICK MENU
e.g.
LIBR
1
/
2
6/22 (Tu)
14:49
s)
ME
Quick Menu
CH Genre
Title Name
DVD space remaininge
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
DVD all disc No.
:
0
5
4
3
3
2
2004/06/20 19 00 Ch:5
Titleinformation
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
21 00
2004/06/19 23 00 Ch:4
2004/06/18 19 00 Ch:3
2004/06/17 21 00 Ch:3
2004/06/13 23 00 Ch:4
2004/06/13 21 00 Ch:3
2004/06/11 21 00 Ch:3
2004/06/
Arrange
QUICK MENU
Narrowing
Jump
Disc information
Exit
4
HDD 2004/ 6/
Library management
L1
L1
:
9
21 00 Ch:3
9
We
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
Press
ENTER.
/
to select an item, then press
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
INPUT SELECT
For details on each item, see from the next page.
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL VOLUME
ENTER
SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR
Notes
• To cancel this procedure, press the LIBRARY button.
• The Library system does not support DVD-R/RW discs.
• Selecting a title on the “LIBRARY MENU Title Summary (All Titles)”, and pressing the ENTER button begins playback of the
title if the disc containing the title is loaded.
• For proper function of the Library system, use DVD-RAM discs that shows a statement on its package such as “This disc can
copy images that permit copying once.” If you use a DVD-RAM disc without such a statement, and then operate it on other
device, the library data of the disc may not function properly.
• The “LIBRARY MENU” may not display all characters of a registered name of a disc.
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Library
HDD
DVD-RAM
Searching for a desired title
From the “LIBRARY MENU Title Summary (All Titles)”, you can select a title by using the
you change the listing order or sort the titles, search may be easier.
/
buttons. If
Sort by genre
The sub-menu appears.
Changing the listing order
Arrange
Press the
/
buttons to select a genre, then press
1) From the Quick Menu, select “Arrange” by
/
the ENTER button.
then press ENTER.
Titles within the selected genre are sorted.
The sub-menu appears.
Sort by disc(DVD)
An input window appears.
e.g.
LIBR
1
/
2
6/22 (Tu)
14:49
es)
ME
Quick Menu
DVD space remaininge Arrange by title name ame
e.g.
DVD all disc No.
Arrange by disc No.
:
LIBRARY
0
2
9 00 Ch:5
1
/
2
6/22 (Tu)
14:49
Title Summary (All Titles)
MENU
Titleinformation
Arrange by genre
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
3 00 Ch:4
No.
Date
Day
Time
CH Genre
Title Name
Arrange
Arrange by week
0
9 00 Ch:3
Narrowing
Jump
Arrange by date
:
:
1 00 Ch:3
2004/ 6/20 Su
19 00
5
4
3
2004/06/20 19 00 Ch:5
0
HDD
:
:
:
:
:
:
2004/06/13 23 00 Ch:4
2004/06/13 21 00 Ch:3
2004/06/11 21 00 Ch:3
2004/06/
2004/06/
:
0
2004/ 6/19 Sa
2004/ 6/18 Fr
2004/ 6/17 T
2004/06/19 23 00 Ch:4
2004/06/18 19 00 Ch:3
06/17 21 00 Ch:3
Disc information
23 00
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
Exit
4
:
HDD 2004/ 6/
HDD
0
19 00
Library management
Sort by disc
0
L1
L1
L2
2004/ 6/13 SuDisc:No.
:
:
0 0 1 –
21 00
9
9
21 00 Ch:3
9
8
We
Tu
2004/06/13 23 00 Ch:4
23 00
:
22 27
etc
...
:
2004/ 6/
22 27 Ch:3
2004/ 6/13 Su
2004/ 6/11 Fr
:
4
L1
2004/06/13 21 00 Ch:3
2004/06/11 21 00 Ch:3
21 00
:
21 00
2) Press
/
to select the listing order, then
Follow steps 1) and 2) below.
1) Press to select a location, then press
ADJUST or to enter the disc number.
2) Press ENTER.
press ENTER.
Titles are arranged in selected order.
/
/
Notes
• If you repeat the selection of different types of the listing
order, the old one precedes the new one. For example,
when you select “Arrange by genre” then “Arrange by disc
No.”, the order of genre is produced in the order of disc
number.
Titles in the specified disc are sorted. For
example, if you enter “001-”, titles in discs 001,
001A and 001B are listed.
Sort By Disc(HDD)
Titles in the HDD are sorted.
Searching
Sort by day
The sub-menu appears.
Narrowing
Press the
/
buttons to select the day, then press
1) From the Quick Menu, select “Narrowing” by
the ENTER button.
Titles recorded on the selected day are listed.
/
then press ENTER.
The sub-menu appears.
Notes
e.g.
LIBR
1
/
2
6/22 (Tu)
14:49
s)
ME
• Press the O button to go back to the display for the
previous narrowing condition.
• If you want to display all titles, press the QUICK MENU
Quick Menu
tle Name
DVD space remaininge
Sortbygenre
DVD all disc No.
Sort by disc(DVD)
0 19 00 Ch:5
:
0
Titleinformation
Sort by disc(HDD)
:
0
3
2
4
9 23 00 Ch:4
Arrange
Sort by day/18
button, then press the
/
buttons to select “Cancel
:
0
19 00 Ch:3
Narrowing
Jump
:
2004/06/17 21 00 Ch:3
0
narrowings” and press the ENTER button.
:
2004/06/13 23 00 Ch:4
0
Disc information
:
Exit
We
Tu
2004/06/13 21 00 Ch:3
0
Library management
:
0
2004/06/11 21 00 Ch:3
L1
L1
L2
:
:
21 00
2004/06/
2004/06/
9
9
21 00 Ch:3
HDD 2004/ 6/
2004/ 6/
9
8
:
22 27
etc
...
:
22 27 Ch:3
HDD
2) Press
/
to select a narrowing condition,
then press ENTER.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Library
Searching for a desired title (Continued)
Appoint disc No.
The on-screen keyboard appears.
Jumping
Jump
e.g.
LIBRARY
1
/
2
6/22 (Tu)
14:49
Title Summary (All Titles)
MENU
1) From the Quick Menu, select “Jump” by
/
No.
Date
Day
Time
CH Genre
Title Name
then press ENTER.
The sub-menu appears.
:
:
2004/ 6/20 Su
2004/ 6/19 Sa
2004/ 6/18 Fr
19 00
5
4
3
2004/06/20 19 00 Ch:5
HDD
:
:
2004/06/19 23 00 Ch:4
23 00
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
:
:
19 00
2004/06/18 19 00 Ch:3
Specific Disc No. Jump
e.g.
:
2004/ 6/17 T
06/17 21 00 Ch:3
LIBRARY
1
/
2
6/22 (Tu)
14:49
Title Summary (All Titles)
MENU
2004/ 6/13 SuDiscNo.
0 0 1 –
:
0006/13 23 00 Ch:4
23 00
No.
Date
Day
Time
CH Genre
Title Name
:
2004/ 6/13 Su
2004/ 6/11 Fr
:
4
2004/06/13 21 00 Ch:3
21 00
:
:
21 00
2004/06/11 21 00 Ch:3
L1
L1
L2
:
:
2004/ 6/20 Su
19 00
5
4
3
3
2
4
L1
L1
2004/06/20 19 00 Ch:5
HDD
:
:
21 00
2004/06/
2004/06/
9
9
21 00 Ch:3
HDD 2004/ 6/
2004/ 6/
9
8
We
Tu
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2004/ 6/19 Sa
2004/ 6/18 Fr
2004/ 6/17 Th
2004/ 6/13 Su
2004/ 6/13 Su
2004/ 6/11 Fr
2004/06/19 23 00 Ch:4
2004/06/18 19 00 Ch:3
2004/06/17 21 00 Ch:3
2004/06/13 23 00 Ch:4
2004/06/13 21 00 Ch:3
2004/06/11 21 00 Ch:3
2004/06/
2004/06/
23 00
19 00
21 00
23 00
21 00
21 00
21 00
22 27
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
:
22 27
etc
...
:
22 27 Ch:3
HDD
Perform steps 1) and 2) below.
1) Press to select the position to enter and
press ADJUST or to enter the disc number.
/
:
9
9
21 00 Ch:3
HDD 2004/ 6/
9
We
Tu
/
etc
...
:
2004/ 6/
8
L2
22 27 Ch:3
HDD
Input 3 digits, and, if necessary A or B of disc. If
you input “–”, you can leave the digit and the lower
unspecified to search. For example, when “1 0 – –”
is input, titles of disc number such as 100, 100A,
102 are searched, and a title list starting from the
first found one appears. It is recommended that you
execute “Arrange by disc No.” beforehand.
2) Press
/
to select the jump method, then
press ENTER.
Appoint character
An input window appears.
e.g.
LIBRARY
2) Press ENTER.
1
/
2
6/22 (Tu)
14:49
Title Summary (All Titles)
MENU
No.
Date
Day
Time
CH Genre
Title Name
The titles of the selected number disc are
displayed.
:
:
2004/ 6/20 Su
2004/ 6/19 Sa
2004/ 6/18 Fr
19 00
5
4
3
2004/06/20 19 00 Ch:5
HDD
:
:
2004/06/19 23 00 Ch:4
23 00
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
:
:
19 00
2004/06/18 19 00 Ch:3
Specific character jump
Character String:
:
2004/ 6/
21 00 Ch:3
Jump
Specific page
An input window appears.
:
:
2004/ 6/13 Su
2004/ 6/13 Su
2004/ 6/11 Fr
2004/06/13 23 00 Ch:4
23 00
:
:
4
2004/06/13 21 00 Ch:3
21 00
:
:
21 00
2004/06/11 21 00 Ch:3
L1
L1
L2
:
:
21 00
2004/06/
2004/06/
9
9
21 00 Ch:3
HDD 2004/ 6/
2004/ 6/
9
8
We
Tu
e.g.
:
22 27
etc
...
:
22 27 Ch:3
HDD
LIBRARY
1
/
2
6/22 (Tu)
14:49
Title Summary (All Titles)
No. Date Day Time
MENU
CH Genre
Title Name
Perform steps 1) to 3) below.
:
:
2004/ 6/20 Su
19 00
5
4
3
2004/06/20 19 00 Ch:5
HDD
:
:
2004/ 6/19 Sa
2004/ 6/18 Fr
2004/ 6/17 T
2004/ 6/13 Su
2004/ 6/13 Su
2004/ 6/11 Fr
2004/06/19 23 00 Ch:4
23 00
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
1) Put the cursor on the input area, and press
ENTER.
:
:
19 00
2004/06/18 19 00 Ch:3
Specific page jump
:
06/17 21 00 Ch:3
Page Number
– – –
:
2406/13 23 00 Ch:4
23 00
The on-screen keyboard appears.
:
:
4
2004/06/13 21 00 Ch:3
21 00
:
:
21 00
2004/06/11 21 00 Ch:3
L1
L1
L2
2) Enter the first characters (up to three
characters) of the title you are looking for.
:
:
21 00
2004/06/
2004/06/
9
9
21 00 Ch:3
HDD 2004/ 6/
2004/ 6/
9
8
We
Tu
:
22 27
etc
...
:
22 27 Ch:3
HDD
3) Press to select “Jump” and press ENTER.
The title that starts with the specified characters is
selected.
Perform steps 1) and 2) below.
1) Press or ADJUST to enter the page
number.
/
Note
• The input window of “Specific character jump” can be
shifted by pressing the buttons.
2) Press ENTER.
/
The selected page is displayed.
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Library
HDD
DVD-RAM
Viewing Library data
This section explains how to check and maintain the Library data.
“Lock”
Viewing title information
Set the protection for the currently selected title.
The protection icon “ ” appears.
Title information
1) From the Quick Menu, select “Title information”
“Genre”:
by
/
then press ENTER.
The sub-menu appears.
You can view information about the selected title.
Press the
the ENTER button.
A name of the selected genre and the icon appear.
/
buttons to select a genre, then press
e.g.
CONTENT
Title information
MENU
(2:06:32)
Title : 006
2004/07/11 22:00 Ch:3
3
CH 2004 7/11(Su)
22:00
Note
• When you change settings of a DVD-RAM disc, load
the DVD-RAM disc.
Documentary/Culture(General)
HDD
Media :
Original
Mode : LP
Rate : 2. 2
Audio :
(0:04:15)
Chapter : 0001
D/ M1
DVD Mode :
Saving :
Off
Off
Viewing disc information
Disc information
You can do the following operations with the Quick
Menu.
1) From the Quick Menu, select “Dics
information” by
/
then press ENTER.
(Press the QUICK MENU button to display the Quick
You can view information about the loaded disc.
Menu. Press
ENTER.)
/
buttons to select an item and press
e.g.
CONTENT
Disc information
MENU
－
001
e.g.
CON
ME
Disc Type
Record Time (h:m)
Remain Time (h:m)
DVD-RAM
VR mode
Quick Menu
Writing Mode
1:51
(2:06:32)
T
4 7/11(Su)
22:00
Edit title name
Original Titles
Playlist Titles
4
0
20
Edit chapter name
(
)
Current SP 4.6Mbps /
D/M1: 0:10
Del chapter name
Record date & time
Lock
)
1
2
3
4
5
MN 6.6Mbps / L-PCM 0:05
:
Disc Status Normal
Disc Lock Lock Off
)
)
)
)
SP 4.6Mbps /
LP 2.2Mbps /
MN 6.0Mbps /
MN 3.2Mbps /
D/M1: 0:10
D/M1: 0:22
D/M2: 0:07
D/M1: 0:15
Edit Disc Name
Documentary/Culture(General)
Genre
Finalize
Video Create
Increment Rec
–
–
Exit
Original
(0:04:15)
Chapter : 0001
Rate : 2. 2
Audio :
Possible
Edit Disc Number
D/ M1
DVD Mode :
Saving :
Off
Off
To change the number or name of the DVD-RAM
disc:
“Edit title name”:
The on-screen keyboard appears.
1) Press
/
to select “Edit Disc Number” or
“Edit Disc Name”, then press the ENTER
button.
Following the procedure on
name for the title.
page 30, enter a new
2) Following the procedure on
a new name for the disc.
page 30, enter
“Edit chapter name”:
To change the disc number, press the ADJUST
button.
(Press the PICTURE SEARCH (
/
) button to
display the chapter that you want to put a name for,
and select the chapter.)
The on-screen keyboard appears.
Note
• You can also change a disc name of a DVD-RW if it is not
finalized yet.
Following the procedure on
name for the chapter.
page 30, enter a new
“Del chapter name”:
(Press the PICTURE SEARCH (
/
) button to
display the chapter that you want to put a name for,
and select the chapter.)
“Record date & time”:
The cursor moves to the date so that you can correct
it.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Library
Viewing Library data (Continued)
Registering a disc manually
Maintenance of Library data
The recorder usually controls the Library database
system automatically. However, in the following cases,
you must maintain and create data manually.
1) Load a DVD-RAM disc that contains information
you want to add.
2) Press LIBRARY.
• When you want to add information about a title, (for
example when you use a DVD-RAM disc recorded
on another device, etc.), to the Library system of the
recorder.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
→ “Registering a disc manually” (
page 144).
4) Press
/
to select “Library management”,
then press ENTER.
• When the Library database memory is full. (Up to
3000 entries can be registered. When you reach this
limit, a message will appear and further additions to the
Library database will be rejected. Erase unnecessary
data to make space.)
A sub-menu appears.
e.g.
LIBR
1
/
2
6/22 (Tu)
14:49
es)
ME
Quick Menu
DVD space remaininge
Add disc
DVD all disc No.
Del title information
0
Titleinformation
Del title information by disc
→ “Erasing unnecessary data” (
page 145).
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
21 00
22 27
Arrange
Delete all DVD-RAM information
Narrowing
Jump
Delete alllibraryinformation
Delete discno.from library
• When you want to rearrange the whole Library
information from the beginning.
Disc information
Create backup
:
Exit
Re-inst all backup
HDD 2004/ 6/
HDD
Library management
2004/06/11 21 00 Ch:3
L1
L2
→ “Deleting all the Library information only” (
145).
page
:
2004/06/
2004/06/
9
9
21 00 Ch:3
9
8
We
Tu
etc
...
:
2004/ 6/
22 27 Ch:3
•
When you save the Library data in another DVD-
RAM disc.
→ “Saving the Library data in a DVD-RAM disc” (
page 146).
5) Press
6) Press
/
to select “Add disc”, then press
ENTER.
/
to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
To cancel, select “No”.
• When you import saved Library data back into the
recorder.
→ “Re-installing the backup data” (
All title information is registered.
page 146).
Note
Notes
• Save your Library data on a DVD-RAM disc. Importing
Library data replaces all current database information in
the recorder, including any data added after you saved the
data onto a DVD-RAM disc.
• To use title information in a DVD-RAM disc recorded on
another device, as the Library data of the recorder, be sure
to follow the procedure of “Registering a disc manually” to
add said data to the Library system. This information
cannot be added automatically.
• If you record content on a DVD-RAM disc on the recorder
and edit the content on the other device, Library data of the
disc may be lost or the disc may not function properly.
• Unless a DVD-RAM disc is registered to the recorder,
information of current or future titles recorded on the disc,
will not registered.
• By registering a disc manually, several discs in same
number consequently may be registered. In this case, the
remaining time is displayed per disc or page. Execution of
“Edit Disc Number” (
page 143) is recommended.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Erasing unnecessary data
Deleting all the Library information only
When the Library database is full (3000 entries).→
Select “Del title information”.
Use this feature when you want to rearrange the
whole Library information from the beginning.
1) Press LIBRARY.
1) Press LIBRARY.
2) Press
/
to select a title.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
3) Press
/
to select “Library management” and
press ENTER.
4) Press
/
to select “Library management”
then press ENTER.
4) Press
/
to select “Delete All DVD-RAM
information” or “Delete all library information”.
Delete all DVD-RAM information:
Deletes all Library information from the DVD-RAM
disc, leaving the Library information on the HDD.
Delete all library information:
5) Press
/
to select “Del title information”, then
press ENTER.
Deletes all Library information from the HDD and
DVD-RAM disc.
6) Press
/
to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
Library data of the title selected in step 2) is
erased.
5) Press ENTER.
To cancel, select “No”.
6) Press
/
to select “Yes” and press ENTER.
To delete information of all titles in the specified data
→ Select “Del title information by disc”.
1) Press LIBRARY.
Forced deletion of disc numbers
A number of an inactive disc can be deleted from the
Library Management, so that it can be assigned to a
new disc.
2) Press
/
to select a title.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
1) Press LIBRARY.
4) Press
/
to select “Library management”
2) Press QUICK MENU.
then press ENTER.
3) Press
/
to select “Library management”,
5) Press
/
to select “Del title information by
then press ENTER.
disc”, then press ENTER.
4) Press
/
to select “Del disc no. from Library”,
6) Press
/
to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
then press ENTER.
Library data of all titles in the disc you selected in
step 2) is erased.
5) Press ADJUST to select a number to delete,
then press ENTER.
To cancel, select “No”.
Note
• Deleting a disc number also deletes data of all titles in the
disc.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Library
Viewing Library data (Continued)
Saving the Library data in a DVD-RAM disc
1) Load a DVD-RAM disc to save the Library data.
2) Press LIBRARY.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
4) Press
/
to select “Library management”,
then press ENTER.
5) Press
/
to select “Create backup”, then
press ENTER.
6) Press
/
to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
To cancel, select “No”.
Re-installing the backup data
1) Load the DVD-RAM disc containing the Library
database.
2) Press LIBRARY.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
4) Press
/
to select “Library management”,
then press ENTER.
5) Press
/
to select “Re-inst all backup”, then
press ENTER.
6) Press
/
to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
To cancel, select “No”.
Note
• Do not use a DVD-RAM disc which contains Library
Management data registered to another recorder for
backup data storage. Library Management format may vary
depending on the model. Adding data of a new format onto
the said disc may prevent the data of the older format from
being re-installed.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Library
HDD
DVD-RAM
Checking remaining space
You can check the remaining space of each disc prior to recording.
Viewing a number and space of a disc
Viewing remaining space
DVD space remaining
DVD all disc No.
1) From the Quick Menu, select “DVD space
1) From the Quick Menu, select “DVD all disc No.”
remaining” by
/
then press ENTER.
by
/
then press ENTER.
You can view the recording titles and the estimated
space remaining per disc.
You can view numbers, names and estimated
remaining spaces about all the registered discs.
Note
To recheck the remaining space for a different “AV
• You can rearrange the list by selecting “Arrange”,
“Narrowing” or “Jump” from the Quick Menu.
record quality” setting
1) Press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
2) Press
/
to select “AV record quality” then
press ENTER.
e.g.
LIBRARY
DVD
u)
14:49
MENU
AV record quality
L-PCM
Setting 1 Setting 2
DVD
HDD
No.
ManualSP
D/M1timated
6.6 L-PCM
4.6
Custom setting
Sp
20min.
10min.
5min.
001
002
003
004
Setting
Mode
Rate Audio quality
Sp
Mo
1
2
Manual
SP
6.6
4.6
2.2
6.0
3.2
L-PCM
D/M1
Liv
3
2min.
LP
D/M1
4
5
Manual
Manual
D/M2
D/M1
Total recording time: approx. 122 min.
(with 4.7 GB unused)
AV quaMenu.
3) Press ADJUST and select the setting (
161).
page
4) Press ENTER.
Note
• It is recommended that beforehand you select a desired
title or disc by “arrange” selection then execute “DVD
space remaining”, because the recorder lists the remaining
space from the specified disc or the one which contains the
specified title.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function Setup
You can change the default settings to customize
performance to your preference.
Customizing the function
settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function Setup
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
Customizing the function settings
You can change the default settings to customize performance to your preference.
During stop, press SETUP.
OPEN/CLOSE
1
DVD
TOP MENU
MENU
RETURN
The following setup display appears.
e.g.
ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO CHANNEL
SETUP
DVD player settings
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
DVD disc menu language
DVD audio language
DVD subtitle language
English
English
No subtitle
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
Press
/
to select the icon of a group that
contains a desired item, then press ENTER.
2
For details on each setting, see the next page.
ENTER
e.g. When “Display settings” is selected:
ENTER
e.g.
Display settings
4:3LB
TV shape
PAUSE
REC
STOP
PLAY
On screen display
Transparency
Startup screen
Screen protector
Background
On
25%
On
On
Blue
QUICK MENU
Press
ENTER.
/
to select a desired item, then press
VIDEO Plus+ EXTEND REC MODE TV CODE
T.SEARCH
3
4
1
2
3
CLEAR
4
5
6
ENTER
DELETE
7
8
0
9
SETUP
ENTER
+
10
Refer to the explanations on pages beginning
from 154, to change the selection by
other buttons, then press ENTER.
/
or
Open the lid.
• To select another item in the same group, repeat
steps 3 to 4.
• To shift to another group, press the O button then
repeat steps 2 to 4.
ENTER
Notes
• The SETUP button can function
even during normal playback.
However some items may be
grayed out and they cannot be
selected. In this case, try again
after playback is stopped.
• The SETUP button does not
function during recording,
Recorded Title Play, Chase Play
or Pause TV modes.
Press SETUP.
5
The setup display disappears and the setting is
completed.
SETUP
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting
Details
Page
DVD player settings
DVD disc menu language
To select a preferred language for disc menus.
To select a preferred language for the sound track.
To select a preferred language for subtitles.
154
154
154
155
155
155
156
156
DVD-VIDEO
DVD audio language
DVD-VIDEO
DVD subtitle language
DVD-VIDEO
DVD dynamic range control
To turn on or off a function that makes faint sounds easier to
hear even if you lower the volume during late-hour playback.
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
Karaoke vocal
To turn on or off the vocal output during DVD KARAOKE disc
playback.
DVD-VIDEO
DVD parental lock
To turn the parental lock function on or off.
DVD-VIDEO
DVD title stop
To turn on or off a feature that automatically stops playback
after a title has been viewed.
DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
PBC
VCD
To use the menu screen when playing a PBC-controllable
VIDEO CD.
Picture/audio settings
PAL/Auto
To select the video system of a disc.
157
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Pause/still
To select the resolution of still pictures. (Field/Frame)
157
157
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
Custom picture select
To select from standard or three customized picture settings.
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Custom picture setting
To customize picture quality settings and store them.
157
157
157
158
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Progressive conversion
To select the system of output signal. (Only when connected
to a PROGRESSIVE TV.)
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Play DNR
To select a setting for playback at a reduced noise level.
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Audio out select
To select an output sound format corresponding to your
system connection.
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
Virtual surround
To turn on or off expansive virtual surround sound effects from
just two speakers.
158
158
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
NICAM
To select a sound type for NICAM programme.
HDD
DVD-RAM
(Continued)
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function Setup
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Setting
Details
Page
159
Display settings
TV shape
HDD
To select a picture size according to the aspect ratio of your
TV.
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
VCD
DVD-VIDEO
On screen display
To turn on or deactivate the operational status display (e.g.,
on the TV screen.
)
159
159
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
Transparency
To select the transparency of the GUI relative to background
pictures.
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
Startup screen
To turn on or off the start-up screen setting that makes the
background picture appear automatically when turning on the power.
159
159
Screen protector
To turn the screen saver on or off.
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
Background
To select a display status when no video signals are present.
159
Operational settings
Operation beep
To turn on or off the confirmation beeper announcing when
each remote command is received.
160
160
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
Recording complete beep
To select whether or not a buzzer sounds when dubbing and
so forth is finished.
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
IR code
To switch the codes that operate the recorder.
160
160
Instant skip interval
HDD
To set the width to skip when the INSTANT SKIP button is
pressed once.
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
Instant replay interval
To set the width to go back when the INSTANT REPLAY
button is pressed once.
160
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
DVD-VIDEO
VCD CD
Title thumbnail point
To select the position of the thumbnail image counting from
the beginning of the title that has been recorded.
160
160
160
160
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
HDD/RAM title play
To activate resume play per title or continuous play.
HDD
DVD-RAM
Still group interval
To select an interval of still picture display.
DVD-RAM
Priority contents
To select the playback priority between JPEG (picture) files
and MP3/WMA (audio) files.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting
Details
Page
DVD recorder operation
AV record quality
To select a set of picture and sound quality settings for
manual programme recording.
161
161
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Picture record mode
To make further setting when you cannot adjust the image
quality with “Custom picture setting” of the “Picture/audio
settings”.
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Audio input level
To adjust the level of recording sound.
161
162
162
162
162
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Aspect ratio(video mode)
To set the aspect ratio for DVD-R/RW recording.
To set the audio for DVD-R/RW recording.
DVD-RW DVD-R
DVD compatible mode
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
DVD-Video:CHP create
To set whether or not chapters are to be automatically created
at a specified interval for DVD-R/RW recording.
DVD-RW DVD-R
Relay recording
To turn on or off a function that makes a recording
automatically onto the HDD when the remainder of the
DVD-RAM disc becomes less than 10 minutes or when a disc
is not loaded.
HDD
DVD-RAM
Management settings
Genre setting
To register the frequently used genre in the menu.
163
163
163
163
164
29
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Eco. mode
To set the front panel display to turn on/off in the standby
mode.
HDD auto stop
HDD
To turn on or off a power saving function that stops the HDD
after a certain period of inactivity.
All HDD titles delete
HDD
To delete all the titles recorded on the HDD, leaving the
Library information on the DVD-RAM disc.
HDD format
HDD
To initialize the HDD.
DVD-RAM physical format
To perform physical formatting of a DVD-RAM disc.
DVD-RAM
Software version
To display the version of the software. The version is only
displayed and cannot be set.
DVD drive software
To display the version of the DVD drive software.
The version is only displayed and it cannot be set.
Initial settings
See
page 28, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”.
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function Setup
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
DVD player settings
DVD disc menu language
German:
To play sound tracks recorded in German.
DVD-VIDEO
English:
To display disc menus in English.
Spanish:
To play sound tracks recorded in Spanish.
French:
To display disc menus in French.
Italian:
To play sound tracks recorded in Italian.
German:
To display disc menus in German.
Others:
To make further choices.
After pressing the ENTER button, follow steps 1) - 4)
below.
Spanish:
To display disc menus in Spanish.
Italian:
e.g.
To display disc menus in Italian.
DVD player settings
Others:
DVD disc menu language
DVD audio language
English
English
Code
E
N
To make a further language choice.
After pressing the ENTER button, follow steps 1) – 4)
below.
DVD subtitle language
No subtitle
DVD dynamic range control On
Karaoke vocal
Off
e.g.
1) Obtain the language code of the preferred
language from the Language code list
DVD player settings
DVD disc menu language
DVD audio language
English
English
Code
(
page 171).
2) Select the first character by pressing the
buttons (or the ADJUST button).
3) Press the buttons to shift. Select the
E
N
DVD subtitle language
No subtitle
DVD dynamic range control On
1) Obtain the language code of the preferred
language from the Language code list
/
/
(
page 171).
2) Select the first character by pressing the
buttons (or the ADJUST button).
3) Press the buttons to shift. Select the
second character by pressing the
buttons (or the ADJUST button).
/
/
4) Press the ENTER button.
/
Note
• Some DVD video discs may be played in a different
language from that you selected. A prior language may be
programmed by the disc.
second character by pressing the
buttons (or the ADJUST button).
/
4) Press the ENTER button.
DVD Subtitle Language
Note
• Some DVD video discs may not include your preset
language. In this case, the recorder automatically displays
disc menus consistent with the disc’s initial language
setting.
English:
To display subtitles in English.
French:
To display subtitles in French.
DVD audio language
German:
To display subtitles in German.
DVD-VIDEO
Spanish:
To display subtitles in Spanish.
English:
To play sound tracks recorded in English.
Italian:
To display subtitles in Italian.
French:
To play sound tracks recorded in French.
No subtitle:
To disable subtitles.
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others:
To make a further choice.
After pressing the ENTER button, follow steps 1) – 4)
Karaoke vocal
Off:
below.
The main vocal sound is not output.
e.g.
On:
DVD player settings
The main vocal sound is output.
DVD disc menu language
DVD audio language
English
English
Code
–
–
DVD dynamic range control On
Karaoke vocal
Off
No subtitle
Notes
• This function is available only for a DVD KARAOKE disc
recorded in Dolby Digital Multi Channel format.
• If you want to enjoy the KARAOKE function, connect an
amplifier or other such device to this recorder.
1) Obtain the language code of the preferred
language from the Language code list
(
page 171).
2) Select the first character by pressing the
buttons (or the ADJUST button).
3) Press the buttons to shift. Select the
DVD parental lock
/
DVD-VIDEO
DVD video discs equipped with the Parental Lock
function have a predetermined limitation level. The
limitation level or limitation method may differ depending
on the disc. For example the total disc may not be played
back, or an extreme violent scene maybe cut or replaced
automatically by another scene.
/
proceeding character by pressing the
buttons (or the ADJUST button).
/
4) Press the ENTER button.
Important
Notes
• Depending on discs, it may not be evident whether the
disc is compatible with the Parental Lock function.
Make sure that the Parental Lock function you set is
activated correctly.
• Some DVD video discs may be set to display subtitles in a
different language from that you selected. A prior subtitle
language may be programmed by the disc.
• Some DVD video discs allow you to change subtitle
selections only via the disc menu. In this case, press the
MENU button and choose the appropriate subtitle
language from the selection on the disc menu.
On:
Select this to activate the Parental Lock function or to
change the setting.
After pressing the ENTER button, follow steps 1) – 3)
below.
DVD dynamic range control
Off:
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
Deactivate the Parental Lock function.
After pressing the ENTER button, follow steps 1)
below.
Turns on or off a function that makes faint sounds easier
to hear even if you lower the volume during late-hour
playback.
1) Enter a 4-digit password by using the
number buttons, then press the ENTER
button.
Off:
The DVD dynamic range control does not function.
On:
If you make a mistake entering your password,
press the CLEAR button before pressing the
ENTER button, and re-enter the correct password.
The DVD dynamic range control functions.
Notes
2) Press the
/
/
/
buttons to move the
• This function is available only for a disc recorded in Dolby
Digital format.
• Depending on the disc you play back, the actual effect of
this function differs.
cursor. Then press the ADJUST button to
enter the code of a country/area whose
standards were used to rate the DVD video
disc, referring to the following list (next page).
(Continued)
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function Setup
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
To change the limitation level of the Parental
Lock function
Country/Area
AUSTRALIA
BELGIUM
CANADA
CHINA
CHINA HONG KONG
DENMARK
FINLAND
Code
AU
BE
CA
CN
HK
DK
FI
FR
DE
ID
Follow step 1) - 3) above.
To change the password
1) Press the STOP button 4 times after
selecting “On” and “Off” in order, and then
press the ENTER button.
FRANCE
GERMANY
INDONESIA
ITALY
JAPAN
MALAYSIA
NETHERLANDS
NORWAY
PHILIPPINES
RUSSIAN FEDERATION
SINGAPORE
SPAIN
SWEDEN
SWITZERLAND
TAIWAN
The password is cleared.
IT
JP
2) Enter a new 4-digit password by using the
number buttons.
MY
NL
NO
PH
RU
SG
ES
SE
CH
TW
TH
GB
US
3) Press the ENTER button.
DVD title stop
DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
Off:
Plays back all following titles on the disc after the
current title has been viewed.
THAILAND
UNITED KINGDOM
UNITED STATES
On:
Recorder is stopped after playback of current title
being viewed is completed.
3) Select the desired limitation level by
pressing the buttons, and then press
/
PBC
the ENTER button.
VCD
e.g.
Off:
Selects normal playback without using the menu
screen of a PBC-controllable VIDEO CD.
DVD parental lock level setting
Area code
Level 8
Level 7
Level 6
Level 5
Level 4
Level 3
Level 2
Level 1
U
S
Prohibited
Allowed
On:
Selects playback using the menu screen of a PBC-
controllable VIDEO CD.
Unless the Parental Lock function is set to
“Off”, a disc that has a higher limitation level
than your selected limitation level cannot be
played back. For example, if you select level 7,
discs exceeding level 8 are locked and cannot
be played back.
When “US” is selected, its limitation level
corresponds to the following settings.
Level 7 : NC-17
Level 6 : R
Level 3 : PG
Level 1 : G
Level 4 : PG13
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Picture/Audio settings
PAL/Auto
2) Press the
/
buttons to select adjustable
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
items, and then press the
select each parameter.
/
buttons to
PAL:
To play a PAL disc. Connect a PAL TV to view a
picture.
Brightness
Auto:
(0) Darker ⇔ Brighter (7)
Contrast
The recorder automatically identifies PAL or NTSC
video system of a disc. Connect a multisystem TV
(PAL/NTSC compatible) to view a picture.
A playback picture may be distorted when detected a
signal change between PAL and NTSC on the disc.
(–7) Lower ⇔ Higher (0)
Color
(–7) Duller ⇔ Brighter (0)
Edge enhance
Note:
Alert message is displayed when detected both PAL
and NTSC video system on the same disc.
(OFF) Normal ⇔ Sharp (ON)
3) After adjusting the items, press the ENTER
button.
Pause/Still
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
Auto:
Normal setting. Pause the moving image without
blurring.
Progressive conversion
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Frame:
There are two types of source content in pictures
recorded in DVD video discs: film content (pictures
recorded from films at 24 frames per second) and video
content (video signals recorded at 25 frames in PAL (30
frames in NTSC) per second). Make this selection
according to the type of content being viewed.
Displays high resolution still image.
Custom picture select
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Select from between 4 picture settings (Normal, Setting
1-3) you stored in the memory.
Auto:
Select this position normally.
The recorder automatically detects source content,
film or video, of playback source, and converts that
signal in the progressive output format in an
appropriate method.
Custom picture setting
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
You can adjust fine picture quality and store up to 3
custom picture settings in the memory of the recorder.
Video:
The recorder filters video signal, and converts it in the
progressive output format appropriately.
Suitable for playback of video content pictures.
1) Press the
/
button to select a desired
setting from 3 settings, and then press the
ENTER button.
Film:
The recorder converts film content pictures in the
progressive output format appropriately.
Suitable for playback of film content pictures.
The progressive output feature will be most effective
under this selection.
e.g.
Picture/Audio settings
PAL/Auto
Pause / Still
PAL
Setting 1
Setting 2
Setting 3
Auto
Normal
Custom picture select
Custom picture setting
Progressive conversion
Play DNR
Auto
Note
Audio out select
Virtual surround
NICAM
Bitstream
Off
On
• Depending on the disc, pictures may be cut off or doubled.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function Setup
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Play DNR
Analog 2ch:
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Select this when a TV or other audio device is
connected to this recorder via the ANALOG output
connectors.
Selects a setting for playback at a reduced noise level.
Press the buttons to select an item then select “On”
/
or “Off” using the
/
buttons.
PCM:
3D-DNR:
Select this when a 2ch digital stereo amplifier is
connected to this recorder. When you play back a disc
recorded in Dolby Digital or MPEG1 format, the sound
is converted to the PCM (2ch) format and output.
Off:
Not activated.
On:
Reduces the noise levels of brightness signals and
color signals present in the video signal during
playback.
Virtual surround
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
Mosquito NR:
This lets you playback discs with acoustic effects having
greater depth and presence even when using only two
speakers.
Off:
Not activated.
On:
Off:
Reduces mosquito (flicker) noise occurring in the
contour sections of images.
Virtual surround effect not activated.
On:
Block NR:
Virtual surround effect activated.
Off:
Not activated.
Notes
• This function is only activated when playing back a disc
recorded with Dolby Digital.
On:
• This function is only activated when “Audio Out Select” is
set to “PCM” if the BITSTREAM/PCM jack of this DVD
recorder is connected to an amplifier or similar device.
• When the virtual surround effect is activated, Dolby
Progressive Sound may be deactivated or sound differently
than usual.
• When the virtual surround effect is activated, the volume
may sound differently than usual.
• Set “Virtual surround” to “Off” if the audio sounds distorted.
Reduces noise that appears in the form of blocks
(block noise) in a portion of the screen during
playback of images with rapid movement.
DNR is the abbreviation for Digital Noise Reduction.
Notes
• DNR effects vary depending on the disc.
• Detailed images may no longer be visible depending on
the scene due to the effects of DNR.
• Depending on the disc or scene, “On” may produce
undesirable picture artifacts or increase noises on
contours. In this instance, select “Off.”
• While you are using the zoom feature, “DNR” does not
function.
Manufactured under license from QSound Labs, Inc. U.S. patent
Nos. 5,105,462, 5,208,860 and 5,440,638 and various foreign
counterpart. Copyright QSound Labs, Inc. 1998-2002. QXpanderTM
is a trademark of QSound Labs, Inc. All rights reserved.
NICAM
Audio out select
HDD
DVD-RAM
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
NICAM programmes are divided into 3 types. NICAM
Stereo, NICAM Mono and Mode I/Mode II (transmission in
another language). NICAM programmes are always
accompanied by a standard mono sound broadcast and you
can select the desired sound on the screen (for recording).
Selects an output sound format corresponding to your
audio system connection.
For details about output sound selection, see
page 75.
Bitstream:
Off:
Select this when an amplifier equipped with built-in
Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG1 decoder is connected to
this recorder.
Only set at this position to record the standard mono
sound during a NICAM broadcast if the stereo sound
is distorted due to inferior reception conditions.
When you play back a disc recorded in Dolby Digital,
DTS or MPEG1 format, digital audio signal is output.
On:
Normally set at this position.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display settings
TV Shape
Background
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
Selects a screen colour when receiving no video signals
such as selecting a non-broadcasting channel.
Select a picture size according to the aspect ratio of your
TV.
Off:
No colour.
For details on this setting, see “TV shape setting”
(
page 50, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
Black:
Black is displayed.
On screen display
Blue:
Blue is displayed.
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
Off:
Important
Deactivates the operational status display (e.g., ) on
the TV screen.
• Depending on signal reception, the Background setting
may be cleared. To prevent this, set this function to
“Off”.
On:
Activates the operational status display (e.g., ) on
the TV screen.
Transparency
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
Selects the transparency of the GUI and its relationship
to the background image.
0% : 25% : 50%
Startup screen
Off:
The startup screen is not displayed.
On:
The startup screen appears automatically when
turning on the power.
Screen protector
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
To reduce TV screen damage (image burn), this function
disengages the pause mode of a playback image. The
display returns to the normal TV screen when the
recorder remains idle for more than 15 minutes. In time
slip mode, the playback pause is released.
If this function is set to “On”, the recorder, if freezes, may
return to the normal by leaving it for about 15 minutes or
longer.
Off:
Deactivates the screen protector function.
On:
Activates the screen protector function.
Note
• Toshiba does not guarantee that this function protects the
159
TV screen by all means.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function Setup
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Operational settings
Operation beep
Instant replay interval
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
Turn on or off a confirmation beeper announcing when a
command is received.
Sets how far back is replayed when the INSTANT
REPLAY button is pressed.
Off:
5 sec. : 10 sec. : 30 sec. : 5 min.
Turns off the beep sound.
Title thumbnail point
On:
Turns on the beep sound.
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
For recorded titles, sets how far a scene from the start is
set as the title thumbnail.
Note
• You cannot turn off beeps for alerts irrespective of this
setting.
0 sec. : 3 sec. : 10 sec. : 35 sec. : 1 min. : 5 min.
Note
• Thumbnails can also be changed to other scenes.
See
page 100.
Recording complete beep
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
HDD/RAM title play
This is used to set whether or not a buzzer sounds when
dubbing and so forth is finished.
HDD
DVD-RAM
Sets the resume play per title.
Off:
Buzzer does not sound.
Title resume:
Remembers the point where you stop playback.
Allows you to resume the playback from that point.
On:
Buzzer sounds.
Serial playback:
Note
You can play back titles (Original, Playlist) stored in
the HDD or a DVD-RAM continuously.
Because there is no division between titles, the
recorder remembers only the last point where you
stopped playback.
• You cannot turn off beeps for alerts irrespective of this
setting.
IR Code
Still group interval
Switches the codes to operate the recorder. If you use
the second and third TOSHIBA HDD/DVD video
recorders, set the different remote codes for each
recorder to avoid confusion in the response of the
recorders.
DVD-RAM
Sets an interval for display of still pictures (in seconds)
when playing back a collection of still images.
1 sec. : 2 sec. : 3 sec. : 5 sec. : 10 sec. : Default
Priority Contents
For details about this setting, refer to “Operating the
second and third TOSHIBA HDD/DVD video recorders
with the remote control of this recorder” (
page 54,
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
To select the playback priority between JPEG (picture)
files and MP3/WMA (audio) files.
DR 1 : DR 2 : DR 3
Photo: JPEG files take priority over MP3/WMA files.
Audio: MP3/WMA files take priority over JPEG files.
Instant skip interval
Notes
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
• If this selection does not correspond to disc contents, the
recorder will take a longer time to start playback of the
disc.
Sets how much time is skipped when the INSTANT SKIP
button is pressed.
• To change this setting to a loaded disc, open the disc tray
after the setting, then close the disc tray to have the
recorder read the disc again.
5 sec. : 10 sec. : 30 sec. : 5 min.
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD recorder operation
Picture record mode
AV record quality
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Adjusts problems with the brightness of video signals of
TV broadcasts or other external input.
You can select from 5 combined picture and sound
quality recording settings prior to actual recording.
Actual selection applied becomes the default setting for
the normal recording or programmed recording.
Press the
/
buttons to select the source, and the
/
buttons to select the mode.
e.g.
AV record quality
(Only use this setting when you cannot adjust the
brightness satisfactorily with the “Custom picture setting”
Setting 1
– – –
DVD
HDD
Manual 6.6 L-PCM
Custom setting
SP 4.6
D/M1
in the “Picture/Audio settings” (
Page 157) of this
Setting
Mode
Manual
SP
Rate Audio quality
recorder.)
1
2
6.6
4.6
2.2
6.0
3.2
L-PCM
D/M1
Important:
3
4
5
LP
D/M1
Manual
Manual
D/M2
• This setting changes the video signal to record and the
recorded signal is not returned to the original state even
when this setting is changed after recording. When
duplicating from VHS tape, if you can check the video
recording state beforehand, we recommend first playing
back for a while and checking the overall brightness
tendency, then setting an appropriate mode.
D/M1
Total recording time: 71min.
(with 4.7 GB unused)
• To make a combination of picture and sound
quality settings.
1) Press the
/
/
/
buttons to select the
Standard:
desired item (“Mode”, “Rate”, or “Audio quality”)
.
The recorder records video signals of TV broadcasts
or other external input without adjusting their
brightness. Use this mode normally.
2) Press the ADJUST button to change the setting
of each item.
Mode 1:
• To apply the combination of picture and sound
quality settings.
The brightness of signals received with this recorder
and external input signals is adjusted automatically.
1) Press the
/
/
/
buttons to select a media
Mode 2:
to record on (HDD or DVD).
This setting is used to record the signals darker when
the screen is too bright.
2) Press the ADJUST button to change the
setting.
Mode 3, 4:
As the number rises, the signals are recorded brighter.
Use these modes to adjust the brightness.
You can confirm the available recording time for
the selected setting on the bottom screen.
3) Press the ENTER button.
Audio input level
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Notes
Sets the audio input level of recorded sound.
Press the buttons to select the desired item, and
buttons to adjust the input level.
• A combination of picture and sound quality settings can be
set for HDD and DVD-RAM respectively.
/
then press the
/
• You can change the combination of picture and sound
quality settings also by displaying the Quick Menu on a
“LIBRARY MENU” or during stop mode, then selecting “AV
record quality”. Either of the above methods updates the
setting of this recorder.
• If you set “SP” or “LP”, you cannot select “L-PCM”.
• Depending on the sound quality settings, the upper limit for
the picture quality setting differs.
RF
(L):
Sets the input level for the left channel.
(R):
Sets the input level for the right channel.
Line, AV 1, AV 2 (L):
Sets the input level for the left channel of the external
input connectors.
• You can adjust the manual rate for picture quality by
0.2 Mbps from 2.0 to 9.2. (You cannot set the rate from 1.4
to 2.0.)
(R):
Sets the input level for the right channel of the external
input connectors.
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function Setup
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Aspect ratio(video mode)
DVD-Video:CHP create
DVD-RW DVD-R
DVD-RW DVD-R
To set the aspect ratio when recording onto a DVD-R/RW
disc.
To set whether chapters are to be automatically created
at a selected interval during DVD-R/RW recording.
4:3:
Off:
Fixes the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Chapters are not set.
16:9:
5 min. : 10 min. : 15 min. : 20 min.
Fixes the aspect ratio at 16:9.
To set the interval at which chapters are automatically
created to 5, 10, 15 or 20 minutes.
Note
Note
• When the bit rate on “AV record quality” is set to
“1.4(Mbps)”, pictures are recorded in 4:3 aspect ratio even
if “16:9” is selected.
• The number of chapters has the upper limit, which varies
depending on the disc condition. If the number reaches it,
no more chapters are created.
DVD compatible mode
Relay recording
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
HDD
DVD-RAM
To set whether or not recording is to be performed in the
format for which recording is allowed by the DVD-Video
standard (video, audio and other data) during recording.
Turn on or off a function that makes a recording
automatically onto the HDD when the remaining space of
a DVD-RAM disc is Reduced to less than 10 minutes or
when a disc is not loaded.
This selection is important for contents when recorded on
this recorder, if they will be copied to DVD-R/RW.
Off:
Deactivates this function.
Off:
For recording of contents which will not be copied to
DVD-R/RW.
On:
Activates this function.
Both the left and right channel sounds are recorded.
When recording directly on a DVD-R/RW disc, this is
ineffective. The recorder will automatically regard this
as “On (Mode I),” and record sound of the main
channel only in stereo. Select “On (Mode I)” or “On
(Mode II)” for a DVD-R/RW recording.
Notes
• The Relay recording does not function during the Rate
conversion dubbing or Line-U dubbing.
• Even if you set “Relay recording” to “Off”, A-B programmed
recording will be performed on the HDD.
• During playback of the HDD when you start Relay
recording and the “CONTENT MENU” is displayed,
playback stops.
On (Mode I):
Records sound of the left channel only in stereo.
• During Relay recording, HDD Title Playback is not
available.
• When the remaining space on the HDD is small, Relay
recording does not function.
On (Mode II):
Records sound of the right channel only in stereo.
Notes
• Time slip function (
page 63) is not possible while “On”
• When you select the manual rate of the picture quality
between 3.0 and 3.8 and set this mode to “On (Mode I)” or
“On (Mode II)”, the picture quality may become lower than
when you set this mode to “Off”.
is selected.
• You can change the setting from the Quick Menu.
• It is no use to make this selection when dubbing. Select
when recording.
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Management settings
Genre setting
All HDD titles delete
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
HDD
This registers a frequently used genre name onto the
menu. Genre names registered here are displayed in the
“Genre” on the Quick Menu.
This deletes all the titles on the HDD. Only the recorded
contents are deleted, so the DVD-RAM disc Library
information and reservation history are left as is and can
continue to be used.
1) Press the
/
buttons to select a position in
the “Current genre list” you want to change,
then press the ENTER button.
All titles are about to be deleted in
spite of title protected. Proceed?
A list of genres appears.
You can turn the pages using the button.
Yes
No
2) Press the
/
buttons to select a genre,
then press the ENTER button.
1) Press the
/
buttons to select “Yes”, then
press the ENTER button.
A list of genre names appears.
2) Confirm the message, press the
/
3) Press the
/
buttons to select a genre
buttons to select “Yes” and then press the
name, then press the ENTER button.
ENTER button.
The selected genre name replaces the previous
one of the position you selected at step 1).
Deletion of all titles starts.
If you want to cancel the deleting, select “No”.
4) Repeat steps 1) to 3) to register genre names.
Note
5) When genre names are registered, press the
O button to return to the “Management
settings” menu.
• If you periodically execute All HDD titles delete, this holds
down fragmentation (increased complexity) of the disc and
maintains good operability.
Eco. mode
To set the front panel display to turn on/off in the standby
mode.
Off:
Sets the front panel display to turn on in the standby
mode.
On:
Sets the front panel display to turn off in the standby
mode.
HDD auto stop
HDD
Off:
Turns off an HDD auto stop mode.
On:
Turns HDD drive off after recorder is idle for
approximately 5 minutes.
When the PLAY or REC button is pressed for the HDD
while the HDD drive is turned off, it takes a little longer
time to play or record.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function Setup
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
HDD Format
HDD
Initializes the HDD.
Normally it is not required to initialize the HDD. However
when the HDD does not function correctly, initializing the
HDD may solve the situation. If you initialize the HDD, all
titles and Library information stored in the HDD are
permanently deleted.
e.g.
HDD Format
Entire disc contents including
library will be erased
if disc is formatted. Proceed?
Start
Cancel
Format
0
%
1) Press the
/
buttons to select “Start”,
then press the ENTER button.
2) Confirm the message, press the
/
buttons to select “Start”, and then press the
ENTER button.
Initialization of the HDD starts.
If you want to cancel the initializing, select
“Cancel”.
DVD-RAM physical format
DVD-RAM
See
page 29.
Setting of picture and sound quality for recording
Sound setting
D/M1
D/M2
L-PCM
Picture quality setting
DVD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
HDD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DVD
HDD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DVD
No
HDD
No
SP
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LP
No
No
MN
Auto
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Before calling service personnel
Error codes on the display
window
Recording duration
Language code list
Specification
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Before calling service personnel
If you experience any of the following difficulties while using this unit, check the list below before consulting your
nearest Toshiba dealer.
Power
Playback
The power is not turned on.
A DVD or CD does not play.
• The power cord is not connected securely.
→ Connect the power cord securely.
• The format of the recorded data does not correspond
to this recorder, or the region number is neither “1”
nor “ALL”.
→ Check the disc.
• A defective or dirty disc is inside.
→ Change the disc.
Connection to your TV
• The HDD mode is selected.
→ Press the DVD button.
There is no TV picture.
• The video cable to this recorder and your TV is not
connected securely.
→ Connect the video cable to this recorder and your
TV securely.
• The input select on your TV is not set property.
→ Select the input to which this recorder is
connected.
The HDD does not play.
• The DVD mode is selected.
→ Press the HDD button.
During playback, picture noise appears.
• Picture noise may appear in the following cases. It is
not a malfunction.
→ There is picture noise in the original recording.
→ Weather, reception conditions may cause noise.
→ The data transmission rate is set to low.
→ The image data processing of this recorder cannot
follow dynamic movement on the screen. (Low
video data rate)
TV reception
There is no picture.
• The antenna cable is not connected securely.
→ Reconnect the antenna cable securely.
→ A physical error has occurred on the DVD disc.
If an error occurs during reading data of a disc,
block-noises may be produced there. Repeated
reading of this location where the error occurred
(retry) can decrease the generation of block noise.
However, it can also raise the possibility of
unintended delays or stops of playback. In order to
prevent them, the recorder limits the number of
times of retry.
There is poor reception.
• Channel settings are not completed.
→ Set the channel settings.
• The antenna cable is not connected securely.
→ Reconnect the antenna cable securely.
• Antenna signal is poor.
→ Consult your dealer for adjustment.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
Program
Cannot be recorded on a DVD-RAM disc.
Timer programming cannot be completed.
• The disc is protected from deleting data.
• Clock setting has not been completed.
→ Set the write-protect tab to the opposite of
→ Complete the clock setting (
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
• The programs list is full.
page 30,
“PROTECT” (
page 8).
• The disc is protected by a PC or the recorder.
→ Disable the protection on the device which
protected the disc.
→ Cancel unwanted programs (
page 43).
• The disc space is not sufficient.
VIDEO Plus+ recording does not work properly.
• Guide channel setting is not completed.
→ Delete unwanted data (
new disc.
page 50) or prepare a
→ Complete the guide channel setting (
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
page 37,
• The disc is not initialized.
→ Initialize the disc (
page 28).
• The disc may contain errors.
→ Complete the physical format on the disc
(
page 29).
• The physical format on the disc is not completed.
→ Complete the physical format on the disc
(
page 29).
• The disc has been recorded in the NTSC system.
You can replay a title that has been recorded in the
NTSC system, but you cannot display it in the
thumbnail or use the edit or dubbing functions.
→ You can use the recorder to initialize the disc to
use it with this recorder, but the contents will be
lost. If you do not want to initialize the disc, you
can still play it, but no other functions are available.
Cannot be recorded on the HDD.
• The DVD mode is selected.
→ Press the HDD button.
• The disc space of the HDD is not sufficient.
→ Delete unwanted data (
page 50) or move the
page 106).
contents to DVD-RAM discs (
• Some causes such as power failure may set the
recorder to reject the operation to protect the HDD.
→ Copy necessary contents recorded in the HDD to
a DVD-RAM disc, and initialize the HDD.
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Before calling service personnel (Continued)
Remote control
The remote control does not work.
• The batteries in the remote control are exhausted.
→ Replace all the batteries in the remote control
(
page 12, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
• The light emitter of the remote control is not pointed
at the receptor of this recorder.
→ Point the emitter of the remote control at the
receptor of this recorder.
• The receptor of this recorder is located too far away
from the remote control.
→ Operate the remote control within 7 meters (23 ft)
from the receptor of this recorder.
• There are obstacles between the remote control and
this recorder.
→ Remove any obstacles.
• The receptor is disturbed by sunlight or fluorescent
light.
→ Change the place of this recorder or shield the
light.
• The remote control mode is not appropriate.
→ Adjust the remote control mode of the remote
control and this recorder (
page 54,
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
Clock
The clock blinks.
→ Complete the initial setting again (
page 30,
page 35,
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
The clock does not keep time.
→ Set the time and date manually (
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Error codes on the display window
The recorder display shows error codes in addition to the message screen.
Main examples are as follows.
The “**” in the “ERR - **” message indicates an error code. To delete this display, press the DISPLAY
button on the remote control.
Error code Description
ERR-01
ERR-10
ERR-11
ERR-12
ERR-13
ERR-14
ERR-15
ERR-16
ERR-17
ERR-18
ERR-19
ERR-1A
Error detected in the physical format.
Exceeded volume detected.
• When creating a DVD-Video
Exceeded number of titles detected.
Exceeded number of chapters detected.
Copy protection information detected.
DVD disc access error detected.
Other errors detected.
HDD access error detected.
Wide image recorded at 1.4 Mbps detected.
Different aspects detected in the same part.
Different resolutions detected in the same part.
Different sound quality modes detected in the same
part.
ERR-1B
ERR-1C
ERR-1D
Invalid control information detected.
Parts created in other recorder.
Parts created with “DVD compatible mode = Off”
detected.
ERR-1E
ERR-1F
ERR-2E
ERR-2F
ERR-30
ERR-31
Invalid parts detected.
Unexpected error detected.
Menu encode error detected.
• When creating a DVD-Video
• When recording on DVD-R/RW
• When dubbing to DVD-R/RW
Overflow of the menu size detected.
Exceeded maximum number of menus detected.
Recovery writing executed from compatibiliy of drive
and disc.
ERR-32
ERR-33
ERR-34
ERR-35
ERR-36
ERR-31
ERR-38
ERR-39
ERR-3A
ER-7000
Incompatibility of disc format detected.
Disc protected.
• When recording on DVD-R/RW
Disc protected or system control data error detected.
Exceeded volume in disc budget calculation detected.
Recording failed. (Title not saved.)
Recording failed. (Title saved.)
Writing failed. (Title not reserved)
Writing failed. (Title saved.)
Unexpected error detected.
Possible error detected in the HDD.
Note
• If you find an error code other than listed above, consult your nearest TOSHIBA dealer.
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Recording duration
Sound rate
D/M1(192kbps)
HDD DVD-RAM
D/M2(384kbps)
HDD DVD-RAM
L-PCM
DVD-RAM
HDD
Remarks
Picture
quality rate
Hour Minute Hour Minute Hour Minute Hour Minute Hour Minute Hour Minute
1.4 106 30
2.0 76
06
04
03
03
03
03
03
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
04
20
59
41
26
12
01
50
41
32
25
18
12
06
01
56
51
47
43
40
36
33
30
28
25
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
08
07
05
04
02
01
95
70
65
60
56
53
50
47
45
42
40
38
37
35
34
33
31
30
29
28
27
26
26
25
24
23
23
22
22
21
21
20
20
19
19
18
18
18
21
23
08
37
41
14
10
27
00
48
48
59
19
47
22
04
52
44
42
43
48
56
08
22
39
59
20
44
09
36
05
35
06
39
13
48
24
01
05
04
03
03
03
03
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
26
00
42
26
13
01
50
41
33
25
18
12
06
01
56
52
47
43
40
37
33
30
28
25
23
20
18
16
14
12
10
09
07
05
04
02
01
00
58
48
45
43
41
39
37
36
34
33
32
31
29
28
28
27
26
25
24
24
23
22
22
21
21
20
20
19
19
18
18
18
33
04
34
18
16
24
42
08
42
22
09
00
56
57
01
08
19
33
49
08
29
52
17
44
12
42
13
45
19
54
30
07
03
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
19
43
35
27
20
13
07
02
57
53
48
44
41
37
34
31
28
26
23
21
19
16
14
12
11
09
07
06
04
03
01
00
Picture quality rate for LP with
Picture quality rate for LP with
D/M2.
D/M1.
17
10
57
27
32
06
04
21
55
43
43
54
15
43
19
01
49
42
39
41
46
54
06
21
38
57
19
42
08
35
03
34
05
38
12
47
23
2.2 70
2.4 64
2.6 60
2.8 56
3.0 53
3.2 50
3.4 47
3.6 44
3.8 42
4.0 40
4.2 38
4.4 37
4.6 35
4.8 34
5.0 33
5.2 31
5.4 30
5.6 29
5.8 28
6.0 27
6.2 26
6.4 26
6.6 25
6.8 24
7.0 23
7.2 23
7.4 22
7.6 22
7.8 21
8.0 21
8.2 20
8.4 20
8.6 19
8.8 19
9.0 18
9.2 18
Picture quality rate for SP with
Picture quality rate for SP with
D/M2.
D/M1.
Manual maximum setting for L-PCM.
Maximum value for the manual mode.
• The recording duration listed above is reference only. Not guaranteed.
• This recording duration applies to the DVD-RAM disc in its initialized condition. The display may vary depending on
the disc.
• If you subtract the actual recording duration from the duration listed in this table, the calculated time period does not
represent the remaining time.
• The consumption of space may vary depending on the picture and sound conditions of the recorded content.
• Use the remaining disc space display feature to see the remaining space in the DVD-RAM disc.
For
Setting 1 (
D /M1 and
D /M2, the digital recording technology for consumer products of Dolby Laboratories is used.
D /M2) records at 384 kbps.
D /M1) records in Dolby Digital at 192 kbps, and Setting 2 (
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Language code list
Table of languages and their abbreviations
Abbreviation
Language
Abbreviation
Language
Abbreviation
Language
– – –
No alternate
language
Chinese
Dutch
English
French
German
Italian
Japanese
Korean
GN
GU
HA
HI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
PT
QU
RM
RN
RO
RU
RW
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
Portuguese
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Rumanian
Russian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
CHI (ZH)
DUT (NL)
ENG (EN)
FRE (FR)
GER (DE)
ITA (IT)
JPN (JA)
KOR (KO)
MAY (MS)
SPA (ES)
AA
Sango
Malay
Spanish
Afar
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
IW
JI
SK
SL
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DA
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU
FA
FI
FJ
FO
FY
GA
GD
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Amharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Belorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Danish
Bhutani
Greek
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
Frisian
Yiddish
JW
KA
KK
KL
KM
KN
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laotian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali
Norwegian
Occitan
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
ST
SU
SV
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swedish
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tongan
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MT
MY
NA
NE
NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
PS
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapük
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Panjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Irish
Scottish Gaelic
Galician
GL
Zulu
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Specification
➔ Power requirement during operation
➔ VIDEO input
41W
1.0Vp-p (75Ω), Sync signal negative,
Pin jack x 1 system, 1 in front
SCART socket x 2 at rear
➔ Power requirement at standby
3.7W (Eco mode: off)
1.9W (Eco mode: on)
➔ VIDEO output
1.0Vp-p (75Ω), Sync signal negative,
Pin jack x 1 system, 1 at rear
SCART socket x 2 at rear
➔ Power supply
230 - 240V AC, 50/60 Hz
➔ Mass
4.7kg
➔ S-VIDEO input
(Y) 1.0Vp-p (75Ω), Sync signal negative,
(C) 0.286Vp-p (75Ω), 1 in front
Mini DIN4 Pin x 1 system
➔ External dimension
Width 430 x Height 78 x Depth 325mm
SCART socket x 1 at rear
➔ Tuner
➔ S-VIDEO output
System: Frequency synthesizer
Channel coverage: PAL I VHF: A-J, 11, 13, E2-E12
UHF: E21-E69
(Y) 1.0Vp-p (75Ω), Sync signal negative,
(C) 0.286Vp-p (75Ω), 1 at rear
Mini DIN4 Pin x 1 system
CATV: X, Y, Z, S1-S41, 1-53
(48MHz to 464MHz, 8MHz
steps)
SCART socket x 1 at rear
➔ COMPONENT output (Y, PB, PR)
Y output (green), 1.0Vp-p (75Ω),
Sync signal negative, Pin jack x 1 system
Stereo: NICAM-I
➔ Antenna input/output terminal
VHF/UHF: 75Ω, IEC Connector
P
B, PR output (blue, red), 0.7Vp-p (75Ω),
Pin jack x 1 system each
➔ Signal system
Standard PAL Colour TV system
➔ RGB input
(R) 0.7Vp-p (75Ω)
➔ Laser
(G) 0.7Vp-p (75Ω)
(B) 0.7Vp-p (75Ω)
Semiconductor laser, Wavelength: 650nm/780nm
SCART socket x 1 at rear (AV2 only)
➔ Format
DVD-VR format
➔ RGB output
DVD-Video format
(R) 0.7Vp-p (75Ω)
(G) 0.7Vp-p (75Ω)
(B) 0.7Vp-p (75Ω)
➔ Image recording system
MPEG2
SCART socket x 1 at rear (AV1 only)
➔ Sound recording system
Dolby Digital M1, M2, Linear PCM
➔ AUDIO input
2.0V (rms), 50kΩ or below, pin jack
(L, R) x 1 system
1 in front
SCART socket x 2 at rear
➔ AUDIO output
2.0V (rms), 200Ω or above, pin jack
(L, R) x 1 system
1 at rear
SCART socket x 2 at rear
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
➔ DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
BITSTREAM/PCM (OPTICAL terminal)
Optical connector x 1 system
➔ DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
BITSTREAM/PCM (COAXIAL terminal)
0.5Vp-p (75Ω), pin jack x 1 system
➔ CHANNEL CHANGE IR jack
This is for connection of the supplied IR control cable
only.
➔ DV input
4-pin x 1 in front
➔ Remote control
Wireless remote control (SE-R0132)
➔ Operating conditions
Temperature: 5°C ~ 35°C,
Position: Horizontal
➔ Clock display
24 hour digital display
➔ Clock accuracy
Quartz (monthly deviation: approximately ±30
seconds)
➔ Supplied Accessories
• Remote control ....................................................... 1
• Batteries (R03)........................................................ 2
• Power cord .............................................................. 1
• Coaxial cable .......................................................... 1
• Video/Audio cable ................................................... 1
• IR control cable ....................................................... 1
• OWNER’S MANUAL (INSTALLATION GUIDE)....... 1
• OWNER’S MANUAL (OPERATIONS)..................... 1
• Quick Reference ..................................................... 1
• The design and specifications may change without prior
notice.
• The Illustrations and screens described in this manual
may be exaggerated or simplified for easy recognition
and may be slightly different from the actual unit.
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memo
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memo
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|